blob: 97e41964f234433fead14bf391053321b41d1b22 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar3b56eb32005-07-11 22:40:32 +0000403 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000404 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
405 {
406 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
407 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
408#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
409 pos.coladd = 0;
410#endif
411 }
412 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
413 }
414
415 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000417 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
418 return (int)col;
419}
420
421#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
422
423static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
424
425/*
426 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
427 */
428 static int
429cin_is_cinword(line)
430 char_u *line;
431{
432 char_u *cinw;
433 char_u *cinw_buf;
434 int cinw_len;
435 int retval = FALSE;
436 int len;
437
438 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
439 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
440 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
441 {
442 line = skipwhite(line);
443 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
444 {
445 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
446 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
447 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
448 {
449 retval = TRUE;
450 break;
451 }
452 }
453 vim_free(cinw_buf);
454 }
455 return retval;
456}
457#endif
458
459/*
460 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
461 *
462 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
463 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
464 *
465 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
466 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
467 * new line.
468 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
469 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
470 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
471 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
472 *
473 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
474 */
475 int
476open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
477 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
478 int flags;
479 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
480{
481 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
482 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
483 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
484 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
485 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
486 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
487 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
488 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
489 int n;
490 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
491 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
492#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
493 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
494 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
495 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
496 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
497#endif
498 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
499#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
500 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
501 char_u *p;
502#endif
503 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
504#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
505 pos_T *pos;
506#endif
507#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
508 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
509# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
510 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
511# endif
512 );
513 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
514 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
515#endif
516#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
517 int vreplace_mode;
518#endif
519 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
520 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
521
522 /*
523 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
524 */
525 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
526 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
527 return FALSE;
528
529#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
530 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
531 {
532 /*
533 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
534 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
535 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
536 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
537 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
538 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
539 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
540 */
541 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
542 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
543 else
544 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
545 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
546 goto theend;
547
548 /*
549 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
550 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
551 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
552 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
553 * etc) a bit later.
554 */
555 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
556 replace_push(NUL);
557 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
558 while (*p != NUL)
559 replace_push(*p++);
560 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
561 }
562#endif
563
564 if ((State & INSERT)
565#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
566 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
567#endif
568 )
569 {
570 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
571#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
572 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
573 {
574 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
575 first_char = *p;
576 }
577#endif
578#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
579 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
580#endif
581 saved_char = *p_extra;
582 *p_extra = NUL;
583 }
584
585 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
586#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
587 did_si = FALSE;
588#endif
589 ai_col = 0;
590
591 /*
592 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
593 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
594 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
595 */
596 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
597 trunc_line = TRUE;
598
599 /*
600 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
601 * indent to use for the new line.
602 */
603 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
604#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
605 || do_si
606#endif
607 )
608 {
609 /*
610 * count white space on current line
611 */
612 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
613 if (newindent == 0)
614 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
615
616#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
617 /*
618 * Do smart indenting.
619 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
620 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
621 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
622 * "if (condition) {"
623 */
624 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
625 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
626 {
627 char_u *ptr;
628 char_u last_char;
629
630 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
631 ptr = saved_line;
632# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
633 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
634 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
635 else
636 lead_len = 0;
637# endif
638 if (dir == FORWARD)
639 {
640 /*
641 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
642 * recognised as comments.
643 */
644 if (
645# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
646 lead_len == 0 &&
647# endif
648 ptr[0] == '#')
649 {
650 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
651 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
652 newindent = get_indent();
653 }
654# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
655 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
656 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
657 else
658 lead_len = 0;
659 if (lead_len > 0)
660 {
661 /*
662 * This case gets the following right:
663 * \*
664 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
665 * *\
666 * #define IN_THE_WAY
667 * This should line up here;
668 */
669 p = skipwhite(ptr);
670 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
671 p++;
672 if (p[0] == '*')
673 {
674 for (p++; *p; p++)
675 {
676 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
677 {
678 /*
679 * End of C comment, indent should line up
680 * with the line containing the start of
681 * the comment
682 */
683 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
684 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
685 {
686 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
687 newindent = get_indent();
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 }
693 else /* Not a comment line */
694# endif
695 {
696 /* Find last non-blank in line */
697 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
698 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
699 --p;
700 last_char = *p;
701
702 /*
703 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
704 */
705 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
706 {
707 if (p > ptr)
708 --p;
709 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
710 --p;
711 }
712 /*
713 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
714 * lines. eg:
715 * if (condition &&
716 * condition) {
717 * Should line up here!
718 * }
719 */
720 if (*p == ')')
721 {
722 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
723 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
724 {
725 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
726 newindent = get_indent();
727 ptr = ml_get_curline();
728 }
729 }
730 /*
731 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
732 * checking for "if" and the like.
733 */
734 if (last_char == '{')
735 {
736 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
737 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
738 }
739 /*
740 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
741 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
742 * '}'.
743 */
744 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
745 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
746 did_si = TRUE;
747 }
748 }
749 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
750 {
751 /*
752 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
753 * recognised as comments.
754 */
755 if (
756# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
757 lead_len == 0 &&
758# endif
759 ptr[0] == '#')
760 {
761 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
762
763 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
764 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
765 {
766 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
767 was_backslashed = TRUE;
768 else
769 was_backslashed = FALSE;
770 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
771 }
772 if (was_backslashed)
773 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
774 else
775 newindent = get_indent();
776 }
777 p = skipwhite(ptr);
778 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
779 did_si = TRUE;
780 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
781 can_si_back = TRUE;
782 }
783 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
784 }
785 if (do_si)
786 can_si = TRUE;
787#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
788
789 did_ai = TRUE;
790 }
791
792#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
793 /*
794 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
795 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
796 */
797 end_comment_pending = NUL;
798 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
799 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
800 else
801 lead_len = 0;
802 if (lead_len > 0)
803 {
804 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
805 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
806 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
807 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
808 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
809 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
810 int current_flag;
811 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
812 char_u *p2;
813
814 /*
815 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
816 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
817 */
818 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
819 {
820 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
821 {
822 require_blank = TRUE;
823 continue;
824 }
825 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
826 {
827 current_flag = *p;
828 if (*p == COM_START)
829 {
830 /*
831 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
832 */
833 if (dir == BACKWARD)
834 {
835 lead_len = 0;
836 break;
837 }
838
839 /* find start of middle part */
840 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
841 require_blank = FALSE;
842 }
843
844 /*
845 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
846 */
847 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
848 {
849 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
850 require_blank = TRUE;
851 ++p;
852 }
853 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
854
855 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
856 {
857 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
858 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
859 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
860 ++p;
861 }
862 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
863
864 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
865 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
866
867 /*
868 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
869 * the comment leader.
870 */
871 if (dir == FORWARD)
872 {
873 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
874 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
875 {
876 comment_end = p;
877 lead_len = 0;
878 break;
879 }
880 }
881
882 /*
883 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
884 */
885 if (lead_len > 0)
886 {
887 if (current_flag == COM_START)
888 {
889 lead_repl = lead_middle;
890 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
891 }
892
893 /*
894 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
895 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
896 * comment leader on the next line.
897 */
898 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
899 && ((p_extra != NULL
900 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
901 || (p_extra == NULL
902 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
903 || require_blank))
904 extra_space = TRUE;
905 }
906 break;
907 }
908 if (*p == COM_END)
909 {
910 /*
911 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
912 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
913 * start (for C-comments).
914 */
915 if (dir == FORWARD)
916 {
917 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
918 lead_len = 0;
919 break;
920 }
921
922 /*
923 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
924 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
925 */
926 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
927 --p;
928 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
929 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
930 ;
931 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
932
933 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
934 * the comment-end */
935 extra_space = TRUE;
936
937 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
938 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
939 {
940 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
941 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
942 }
943 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
944 {
945 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
946 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
947 p2++;
948 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
949 }
950 break;
951 }
952 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
953 {
954 /*
955 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
956 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
957 */
958 if (dir == BACKWARD)
959 lead_len = 0;
960 else
961 {
962 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
963 lead_repl_len = 0;
964 }
965 break;
966 }
967 }
968 if (lead_len)
969 {
970 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
971 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
972 extra_len + 1);
973 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
974
975 if (leader == NULL)
976 lead_len = 0;
977 else
978 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000979 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001075 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001105 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001843 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001986 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
Bram Moolenaar7e8fd632006-02-18 22:14:51 +00002037#ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
2038 && !ins_compl_active()
2039#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002040 )
2041 showmatch(c);
2042
2043#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2044 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2045#endif
2046 {
2047 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2048#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2049 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2050#else
2051 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2052#endif
2053 }
2054 /*
2055 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2056 */
2057}
2058
2059/*
2060 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2061 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2062 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2063 */
2064 void
2065ins_str(s)
2066 char_u *s;
2067{
2068 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2069 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2070 int oldlen;
2071 colnr_T col;
2072 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2073
2074#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2075 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2076 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2077#endif
2078
2079 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2080 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2081 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2082
2083 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2084 if (newp == NULL)
2085 return;
2086 if (col > 0)
2087 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2088 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2089 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2090 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2091 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2092 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2093}
2094
2095/*
2096 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2097 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2098 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2099 *
2100 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2101 */
2102 int
2103del_char(fixpos)
2104 int fixpos;
2105{
2106#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2107 if (has_mbyte)
2108 {
2109 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2110 mb_adjust_cursor();
2111 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2112 return FAIL;
2113 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2114 }
2115#endif
Bram Moolenaare3226be2005-12-18 22:10:00 +00002116 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002117}
2118
2119#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2120/*
2121 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2122 */
2123 int
2124del_chars(count, fixpos)
2125 long count;
2126 int fixpos;
2127{
2128 long bytes = 0;
2129 long i;
2130 char_u *p;
2131 int l;
2132
2133 p = ml_get_cursor();
2134 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2135 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00002136 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002137 bytes += l;
2138 p += l;
2139 }
Bram Moolenaare3226be2005-12-18 22:10:00 +00002140 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002141}
2142#endif
2143
2144/*
2145 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2146 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2147 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2148 *
2149 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2150 */
Bram Moolenaara9b1e742005-12-19 22:14:58 +00002151/*ARGSUSED*/
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002152 int
Bram Moolenaare3226be2005-12-18 22:10:00 +00002153del_bytes(count, fixpos, use_delcombine)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002154 long count;
2155 int fixpos;
Bram Moolenaare3226be2005-12-18 22:10:00 +00002156 int use_delcombine; /* 'delcombine' option applies */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002157{
2158 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2159 colnr_T oldlen;
2160 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2161 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2162 int was_alloced;
2163 long movelen;
2164
2165 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2166 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2167
2168 /*
2169 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2170 */
2171 if (col >= oldlen)
2172 return FAIL;
2173
2174#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2175 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2176 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaare3226be2005-12-18 22:10:00 +00002177 if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2178 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002179 {
2180 int c1, c2;
2181 int n;
2182
2183 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2184 if (c1 != NUL)
2185 {
2186 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2187 n = col;
2188 do
2189 {
2190 col = n;
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00002191 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002192 n += count;
2193 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2194 fixpos = 0;
2195 }
2196 }
2197#endif
2198
2199 /*
2200 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2201 */
2202 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2203 if (movelen <= 1)
2204 {
2205 /*
2206 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2207 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2208 */
2209 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2210 {
2211 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2212#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2213 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2214#endif
2215#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2216 if (has_mbyte)
2217 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2218 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2219#endif
2220 }
2221 count = oldlen - col;
2222 movelen = 1;
2223 }
2224
2225 /*
2226 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2227 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2228 */
2229 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2230#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2231 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2232 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2233 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2234#endif
2235 if (was_alloced)
2236 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2237 else
2238 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2239 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2240 if (newp == NULL)
2241 return FAIL;
2242 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2243 }
2244 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2245 if (!was_alloced)
2246 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2247
2248 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2249 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2250
2251 return OK;
2252}
2253
2254/*
2255 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2256 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2257 *
2258 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2259 */
2260 int
2261truncate_line(fixpos)
2262 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2263{
2264 char_u *newp;
2265 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2266 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2267
2268 if (col == 0)
2269 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2270 else
2271 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2272
2273 if (newp == NULL)
2274 return FAIL;
2275
2276 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2277
2278 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2279 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2280
2281 /*
2282 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2283 */
2284 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2285 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2286
2287 return OK;
2288}
2289
2290/*
2291 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2292 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2293 */
2294 void
2295del_lines(nlines, undo)
2296 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2297 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2298{
2299 long n;
2300
2301 if (nlines <= 0)
2302 return;
2303
2304 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2305 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2306 return;
2307
2308 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2309 {
2310 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2311 break;
2312
2313 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2314 ++n;
2315
2316 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2317 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2318 break;
2319 }
2320 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2321 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2322
2323 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2324 check_cursor_lnum();
2325}
2326
2327 int
2328gchar_pos(pos)
2329 pos_T *pos;
2330{
2331 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2332
2333#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2334 if (has_mbyte)
2335 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2336#endif
2337 return (int)*ptr;
2338}
2339
2340 int
2341gchar_cursor()
2342{
2343#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2344 if (has_mbyte)
2345 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2346#endif
2347 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2348}
2349
2350/*
2351 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2352 * It is directly written into the block.
2353 */
2354 void
2355pchar_cursor(c)
2356 int c;
2357{
2358 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2359 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2360}
2361
2362#if 0 /* not used */
2363/*
2364 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2365 */
2366 void
2367goto_endofbuf(pos)
2368 pos_T *pos;
2369{
2370 char_u *p;
2371
2372 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2373 pos->col = 0;
2374 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2375 while (*p++)
2376 ++pos->col;
2377}
2378#endif
2379
2380/*
2381 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2382 * non-blank in the line.
2383 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2384 * the line.
2385 */
2386 int
2387inindent(extra)
2388 int extra;
2389{
2390 char_u *ptr;
2391 colnr_T col;
2392
2393 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2394 ++ptr;
2395 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2396 return TRUE;
2397 else
2398 return FALSE;
2399}
2400
2401/*
2402 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2403 */
2404 char_u *
2405skip_to_option_part(p)
2406 char_u *p;
2407{
2408 if (*p == ',')
2409 ++p;
2410 while (*p == ' ')
2411 ++p;
2412 return p;
2413}
2414
2415/*
2416 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2417 *
2418 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2419 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2420 */
2421 void
2422changed()
2423{
2424#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2425 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2426 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2427 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2428 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2429 return;
2430 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2431#endif
2432
2433 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2434 {
2435 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2436
2437 change_warning(0);
2438 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2439 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2440 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2441#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2442 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2443#endif
2444 )
2445 {
2446 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2447
2448 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2449 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2450 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2451 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2452 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2453 {
2454 out_flush();
2455 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2456 wait_return(TRUE);
2457 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2458 }
2459 }
2460 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002461 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002462#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2463 check_status(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar997fb4b2006-02-17 21:53:23 +00002464 redraw_tabline = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002465#endif
2466#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2467 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2468#endif
2469 }
2470 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002471}
2472
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002473static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2474static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002475static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2476
2477/*
2478 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2479 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2480 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2481 * - invalidates cached values
2482 */
2483 void
2484changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2485 linenr_T lnum;
2486 colnr_T col;
2487{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002488 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002489 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002490
2491#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2492 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2493 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2494 {
2495 win_T *wp;
2496 linenr_T wlnum;
2497
2498 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2499 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2500 {
2501 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2502 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2503 if (wlnum > 0)
2504 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2505 }
2506 }
2507#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002508}
2509
2510 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2512 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002513 linenr_T lnum;
2514{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002515 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002516 {
2517 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002518 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2519 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2520 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002522 }
2523 else
2524 {
2525 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002526 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2527 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2528 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2529 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002530 }
2531}
2532
2533/*
2534 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2535 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2536 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2537 */
2538 void
2539appended_lines(lnum, count)
2540 linenr_T lnum;
2541 long count;
2542{
2543 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2544}
2545
2546/*
2547 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2548 */
2549 void
2550appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2551 linenr_T lnum;
2552 long count;
2553{
2554 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2555 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2556}
2557
2558/*
2559 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2560 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2561 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2562 */
2563 void
2564deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2565 linenr_T lnum;
2566 long count;
2567{
2568 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2569}
2570
2571/*
2572 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2573 */
2574 void
2575deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2576 linenr_T lnum;
2577 long count;
2578{
2579 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2580 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2581}
2582
2583/*
2584 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2585 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2586 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2587 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2588 * - invalidate cached values
2589 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2590 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2591 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2592 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2593 */
2594 void
2595changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2596 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2597 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2598 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2599 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2600{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002601 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2602
2603#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2604 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2605 {
2606 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2607 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2608 * displaying. */
2609 win_T *wp;
2610 linenr_T wlnum;
2611
2612 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2613 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2614 {
2615 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2616 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2617 if (wlnum > 0)
2618 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2619 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2620 }
2621 }
2622#endif
2623
2624 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2625}
2626
2627 static void
2628changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2629 buf_T *buf;
2630 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2631 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2632 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2633{
2634 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002635 {
2636 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002637 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2638 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2639 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002640 {
2641 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002642 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2643 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2644 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002645 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2647 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2648 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002649 }
2650 else
2651 {
2652 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002653 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2654 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2655 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2656 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002657 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002658}
2659
2660 static void
2661changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2662 linenr_T lnum;
2663 colnr_T col;
2664 linenr_T lnume;
2665 long xtra;
2666{
2667 win_T *wp;
2668 int i;
2669#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2670 int cols;
2671 pos_T *p;
2672 int add;
2673#endif
2674
2675 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2676 changed();
2677
2678 /* set the '. mark */
2679 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2680 {
2681 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2682 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2683
2684#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2685 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2686 * don't have an entry yet. */
2687 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2688 {
2689 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2690 add = TRUE;
2691 else
2692 {
2693 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2694 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2695 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2696 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2697 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2698 add = TRUE;
2699 else
2700 {
2701 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2702 if (cols == 0)
2703 cols = 79;
2704 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2705 }
2706 }
2707 if (add)
2708 {
2709 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2710 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2711 * position in the changelist. */
2712 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2713
2714 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2715 {
2716 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2717 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2718 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2719 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2720 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2721 {
2722 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2723 * this buffer. */
2724 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2725 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2726 }
2727 }
2728 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2729 {
2730 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2731 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2732 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2733 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2734 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2735 }
2736 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737 }
2738 }
2739 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2740 curbuf->b_last_change;
2741 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2742 * takes you back to it. */
2743 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2744#endif
2745 }
2746
2747 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2748 {
2749 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2750 {
2751 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2752 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2753 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2754
2755 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2756 * values for the cursor. */
2757#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2758 /*
2759 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2760 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2761 */
2762 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2763
2764 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2765 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2766 * might be displayed differently.
2767 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2768 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2769 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2770 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2771 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2772 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2773 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2774 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2775
2776 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2777 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2778 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2779 {
2780 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2781 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2782 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2783 }
2784#endif
2785
2786 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2787 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2788 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2789 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2790 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2791 {
2792 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2793 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2794 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2795 }
2796
2797 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2798 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2799 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2800 * after the change. */
2801 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2802 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2803 {
2804 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2805 {
2806 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2807 {
2808 /* line included in change */
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2810 }
2811 else if (xtra != 0)
2812 {
2813 /* line below change */
2814 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2815#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2816 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2817#endif
2818 }
2819 }
2820#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2821 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2822 {
2823 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2824 * may need to be redrawn */
2825 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2826 }
2827#endif
2828 }
2829 }
2830 }
2831
2832 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2833 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2834 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2835 must_redraw = VALID;
2836}
2837
2838/*
2839 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2840 */
2841 void
2842unchanged(buf, ff)
2843 buf_T *buf;
2844 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2845{
2846 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2847 {
2848 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002849 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002850 if (ff)
2851 save_file_ff(buf);
2852#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2853 check_status(buf);
Bram Moolenaar997fb4b2006-02-17 21:53:23 +00002854 redraw_tabline = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002855#endif
2856#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2857 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2858#endif
2859 }
2860 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002861#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2862 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2863#endif
2864}
2865
2866#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2867/*
2868 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2869 * need to be updated
2870 */
2871 void
2872check_status(buf)
2873 buf_T *buf;
2874{
2875 win_T *wp;
2876
2877 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2878 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2879 {
2880 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2881 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2882 must_redraw = VALID;
2883 }
2884}
2885#endif
2886
2887/*
2888 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2889 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2890 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
Bram Moolenaard5cdbeb2005-10-10 20:59:28 +00002891 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002892 * will be TRUE.
2893 */
2894 void
2895change_warning(col)
2896 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2897 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2898{
2899 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2900 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2901#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2902 && !autocmd_busy
2903#endif
2904 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2905 {
2906#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2907 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2908 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2909 return;
2910#endif
2911 /*
2912 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2913 * be after the mode message.
2914 */
2915 msg_start();
2916 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2917 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002918 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002919 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2920 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2921 msg_clr_eos();
2922 (void)msg_end();
2923 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2924 {
2925 out_flush();
2926 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2927 }
2928 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2929 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2930 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2931 showmode();
2932 }
2933}
2934
2935/*
2936 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2937 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2938 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2939 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2940 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2941 *
2942 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2943 */
2944 int
2945ask_yesno(str, direct)
2946 char_u *str;
2947 int direct;
2948{
2949 int r = ' ';
2950 int save_State = State;
2951
2952 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2953 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2954 ++no_wait_return;
2955#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2956 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2957#endif
2958 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2959#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2960 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2961#endif
2962 ++no_mapping;
2963 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2964
2965 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2966 {
2967 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2968 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2969 if (direct)
2970 r = get_keystroke();
2971 else
2972 r = safe_vgetc();
2973 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2974 r = 'n';
2975 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2976 out_flush();
2977 }
2978 --no_wait_return;
2979 State = save_State;
2980#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2981 setmouse();
2982#endif
2983 --no_mapping;
2984 --allow_keys;
2985
2986 return r;
2987}
2988
2989/*
2990 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2991 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2992 * button (used at the more prompt).
2993 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2994 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2995 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2996 */
2997 int
2998get_keystroke()
2999{
3000#define CBUFLEN 151
3001 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
3002 int len = 0;
3003 int n;
3004 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3005
3006 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
3007 for (;;)
3008 {
3009 cursor_on();
3010 out_flush();
3011
3012 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3013 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3014 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3015 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3016 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3017 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3018 if (n > 0)
3019 {
3020 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3021 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3022 len += n;
3023 }
3024
3025 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3026 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3027 continue;
3028 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3029 if (n > 0)
3030 len = n;
3031 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3032 continue;
3033
3034 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3035 n = buf[0];
3036 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3037 {
3038 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3039 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3040 || n == K_IGNORE
3041#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3042 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3043 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3044 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3045 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3046 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3047 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3048 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3049 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3050 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3051 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3052 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3053 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3054 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3055 || n == K_X1DRAG
3056 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3057 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3058 || n == K_X2DRAG
3059 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3060# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3061 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3062 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3063# endif
3064#endif
3065 )
3066 {
3067 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3068 mod_mask = buf[2];
3069 len -= 3;
3070 if (len > 0)
3071 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3072 continue;
3073 }
3074 }
3075#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3076 if (has_mbyte)
3077 {
3078 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3079 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3080 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3081 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3082 }
3083#endif
3084#ifdef UNIX
3085 if (n == intr_char)
3086 n = ESC;
3087#endif
3088 break;
3089 }
3090
3091 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3092 return n;
3093}
3094
3095/*
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003096 * Get a number from the user.
3097 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003098 */
3099 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003100get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3101 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3102 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003103{
3104 int n = 0;
3105 int c;
3106
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003107 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3108 *mouse_used = FALSE;
3109
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003110 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3111 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3112 if (msg_silent != 0)
3113 return 0;
3114
3115#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3116 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3117#endif
3118 ++no_mapping;
3119 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3120 for (;;)
3121 {
3122 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3123 c = safe_vgetc();
3124 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3125 {
3126 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3127 msg_putchar(c);
3128 }
3129 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3130 {
3131 n /= 10;
3132 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3133 }
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003134#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3135 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3136 {
3137 *mouse_used = TRUE;
3138 n = mouse_row + 1;
3139 break;
3140 }
3141#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003142 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3143 {
3144 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3145 if (!exmode_active)
3146 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3147 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3148 do_redraw = FALSE;
3149 break;
3150 }
3151 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3152 break;
3153 }
3154 --no_mapping;
3155 --allow_keys;
3156 return n;
3157}
3158
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003159/*
3160 * Ask the user to enter a number.
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003161 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3162 * the line number.
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003163 */
3164 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003165prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3166 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003167{
3168 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003169 int save_cmdline_row;
3170 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003171
3172 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
Bram Moolenaar42eeac32005-06-29 22:40:58 +00003173 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3174 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3175 else
3176 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003177
3178 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3179 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3180 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3181 save_State = State;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003182 if (mouse_used == NULL)
3183 State = CMDLINE;
3184 else
3185 State = NORMAL;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003186
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003187 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3188 if (KeyTyped)
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003189 {
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003190 /* don't call wait_return() now */
3191 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003192 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3193 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3194 msg_didany = FALSE;
3195 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003196 else
3197 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3198 State = save_State;
3199
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003200 return i;
3201}
3202
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003203 void
3204msgmore(n)
3205 long n;
3206{
3207 long pn;
3208
3209 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003210 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3211 return;
3212
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003213 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3214 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3215 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3216 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3217 return;
3218
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003219 if (n > 0)
3220 pn = n;
3221 else
3222 pn = -n;
3223
3224 if (pn > p_report)
3225 {
3226 if (pn == 1)
3227 {
3228 if (n > 0)
3229 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3230 else
3231 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3232 }
3233 else
3234 {
3235 if (n > 0)
3236 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3237 else
3238 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3239 }
3240 if (got_int)
3241 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3242 if (msg(msg_buf))
3243 {
3244 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3245 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003246 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003247 }
3248 }
3249}
3250
3251/*
3252 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3253 */
3254 void
3255beep_flush()
3256{
3257 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3258 {
3259 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3260 vim_beep();
3261 }
3262}
3263
3264/*
3265 * give a warning for an error
3266 */
3267 void
3268vim_beep()
3269{
3270 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3271 {
3272 if (p_vb
3273#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3274 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3275 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3276 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3277#endif
3278 )
3279 {
3280 out_str(T_VB);
3281 }
3282 else
3283 {
3284#ifdef MSDOS
3285 /*
3286 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3287 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3288 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3289 */
3290 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3291 {
3292 out_char(BELL);
3293 beep_count = 1;
3294 }
3295 else
3296 ++beep_count;
3297#else
3298 out_char(BELL);
3299#endif
3300 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003301
3302 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3303 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3304 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3305 {
3306 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3307 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3308 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003309 }
3310}
3311
3312/*
3313 * To get the "real" home directory:
3314 * - get value of $HOME
3315 * For Unix:
3316 * - go to that directory
3317 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3318 * This also works with mounts and links.
3319 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3320 */
3321static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3322
3323 void
3324init_homedir()
3325{
3326 char_u *var;
3327
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003328 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3329 vim_free(homedir);
3330 homedir = NULL;
3331
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003332#ifdef VMS
3333 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3334#else
3335 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3336#endif
3337
3338 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3339 var = NULL;
3340
3341#ifdef WIN3264
3342 /*
3343 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3344 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3345 * when $HOME is being set.
3346 */
3347 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3348 {
3349 char_u *p;
3350 char_u *exp;
3351
3352 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3353 if (p != NULL)
3354 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003355 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003356 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3357 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3358 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3359 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003360 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003361 var = NameBuff;
3362 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3363 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3364 }
3365 }
3366 }
3367
3368 /*
3369 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3370 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3371 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3372 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3373 */
3374 if (var == NULL)
3375 {
3376 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3377
3378 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3379 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3380 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3381 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3382 {
3383 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3384 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3385 {
3386 var = NameBuff;
3387 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3388 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3389 }
3390 }
3391 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003392
3393# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3394 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3395 {
3396 int len;
3397 char_u *pp;
3398
3399 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3400 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3401 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3402 if (pp != NULL)
3403 {
3404 homedir = pp;
3405 return;
3406 }
3407 }
3408# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003409#endif
3410
3411#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3412 /*
3413 * Default home dir is C:/
3414 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3415 */
3416 if (var == NULL)
3417 var = "C:/";
3418#endif
3419 if (var != NULL)
3420 {
3421#ifdef UNIX
3422 /*
3423 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3424 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3425 */
3426 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3427 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3428 {
3429 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3430 var = IObuff;
3431 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3432 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3433 }
3434#endif
3435 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3436 }
3437}
3438
Bram Moolenaarf461c8e2005-06-25 23:04:51 +00003439#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3440 void
3441free_homedir()
3442{
3443 vim_free(homedir);
3444}
3445#endif
3446
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003447/*
3448 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3449 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3450 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3451 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3452 */
3453 void
3454expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3455 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3456 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3457 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3458{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003459 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003460}
3461
3462 void
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003463expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3464 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003465 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3466 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3467 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003468 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003469{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003470 char_u *src;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003471 char_u *tail;
3472 int c;
3473 char_u *var;
3474 int copy_char;
3475 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3476 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003477 int startstr_len = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003478
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003479 if (startstr != NULL)
3480 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3481
3482 src = skipwhite(srcp);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003483 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3484 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3485 {
3486 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003487 if ((*src == '$'
3488#ifdef VMS
3489 && at_start
3490#endif
3491 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003492#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3493 || *src == '%'
3494#endif
3495 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3496 {
3497 mustfree = FALSE;
3498
3499 /*
3500 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3501 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3502 */
3503 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3504 {
3505 tail = src + 1;
3506 var = dst;
3507 c = dstlen - 1;
3508
3509#ifdef UNIX
3510 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3511 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3512 {
3513 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3514 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3515 *var++ = *tail++;
3516 }
3517 else
3518#endif
3519 {
3520 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3521#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3522 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3523#endif
3524 ))
3525 {
3526#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3527 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3528 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3529#else
3530 *var++ = *tail++;
3531#endif
3532 }
3533 }
3534
3535#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3536# ifdef UNIX
3537 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3538# else
3539 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3540# endif
3541 var = NULL;
3542 else
3543 {
3544# ifdef UNIX
3545 if (src[1] == '{')
3546# else
3547 if (*src == '%')
3548#endif
3549 ++tail;
3550#endif
3551 *var = NUL;
3552 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3553#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3554 }
3555#endif
3556 }
3557 /* home directory */
3558 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3559 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3560 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3561 {
3562 var = homedir;
3563 tail = src + 1;
3564 }
3565 else /* user directory */
3566 {
3567#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3568 /*
3569 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3570 */
3571 tail = src;
3572 var = dst;
3573 c = dstlen - 1;
3574 while ( c-- > 0
3575 && *tail
3576 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3577 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3578 *var++ = *tail++;
3579 *var = NUL;
3580# ifdef UNIX
3581 /*
3582 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3583 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3584 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3585 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3586 */
3587# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3588 {
3589 struct passwd *pw;
3590
Bram Moolenaara40ceaf2006-01-13 22:35:40 +00003591 /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
3592 * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003593 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3594 if (pw != NULL)
3595 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3596 else
3597 var = NULL;
3598 }
3599 if (var == NULL)
3600# endif
3601 {
3602 expand_T xpc;
3603
3604 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3605 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3606 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3607 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3608 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3609 mustfree = TRUE;
3610 }
3611
3612# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3613 /*
3614 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3615 * directories to search for the user account in.
3616 */
3617 {
3618 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3619 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3620 struct stat st;
3621
3622 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3623 next_path = paths;
3624 while (*next_path)
3625 {
3626 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3627 next_path++);
3628 if (*next_path)
3629 *next_path++ = NUL;
3630 STRCPY(test, path);
3631 STRCAT(test, "/");
3632 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3633 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3634 {
3635 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3636 STRCPY(var, test);
3637 mustfree = TRUE;
3638 break;
3639 }
3640 }
3641 }
3642# endif /* UNIX */
3643#else
3644 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3645 var = NULL;
3646 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3647#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3648 }
3649
3650#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3651 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3652 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3653 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3654 {
3655 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3656
3657 if (p != NULL)
3658 {
3659 if (mustfree)
3660 vim_free(var);
3661 var = p;
3662 mustfree = TRUE;
3663 forward_slash(var);
3664 }
3665 }
3666#endif
3667
3668 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3669 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3670 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3671 {
3672 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3673
3674 if (p != NULL)
3675 {
3676 if (mustfree)
3677 vim_free(var);
3678 var = p;
3679 mustfree = TRUE;
3680 }
3681 }
3682
3683 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3684 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3685 {
3686 STRCPY(dst, var);
3687 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003688 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003689 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3690 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003691 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003692#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3693 && dst[-1] != ':'
3694#endif
3695 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3696 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003697 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003698 src = tail;
3699 copy_char = FALSE;
3700 }
3701 if (mustfree)
3702 vim_free(var);
3703 }
3704
3705 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3706 {
3707 /*
3708 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3709 */
3710 at_start = FALSE;
3711 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3712 {
3713 *dst++ = *src++;
3714 --dstlen;
3715 }
3716 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3717 at_start = TRUE;
3718 *dst++ = *src++;
3719 --dstlen;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003720
3721 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3722 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3723 at_start = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003724 }
3725 }
3726 *dst = NUL;
3727}
3728
3729/*
3730 * Vim's version of getenv().
3731 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003732 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003733 */
3734 char_u *
3735vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3736 char_u *name;
3737 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3738{
3739 char_u *p;
3740 char_u *pend;
3741 int vimruntime;
3742
3743#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3744 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3745 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3746 return homedir;
3747#endif
3748
3749 p = mch_getenv(name);
3750 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3751 p = NULL;
3752
3753 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003754 {
3755#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3756 if (enc_utf8)
3757 {
3758 int len;
3759 char_u *pp;
3760
3761 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3762 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3763 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3764 if (pp != NULL)
3765 {
3766 p = pp;
3767 *mustfree = TRUE;
3768 }
3769 }
3770#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003771 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003772 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003773
3774 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3775 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3776 return NULL;
3777
3778 /*
3779 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3780 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3781 */
3782 if (vimruntime
3783#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3784 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3785#endif
3786 )
3787 {
3788 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3789 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3790 p = NULL;
3791 if (p != NULL)
3792 {
3793 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3794 if (p != NULL)
3795 *mustfree = TRUE;
3796 else
3797 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003798
3799#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3800 if (enc_utf8)
3801 {
3802 int len;
3803 char_u *pp;
3804
3805 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3806 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3807 * characters. */
3808 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3809 if (pp != NULL)
3810 {
3811 if (mustfree)
3812 vim_free(p);
3813 p = pp;
3814 *mustfree = TRUE;
3815 }
3816 }
3817#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003818 }
3819 }
3820
3821 /*
3822 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3823 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3824 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3825 */
3826 if (p == NULL)
3827 {
3828 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3829 p = p_hf;
3830#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3831 /*
3832 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3833 */
3834 else
3835 p = exe_name;
3836#endif
3837 if (p != NULL)
3838 {
3839 /* remove the file name */
3840 pend = gettail(p);
3841
3842 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3843 if (p == p_hf)
3844 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3845
3846#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3847# ifdef MACOS_X
3848 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3849 if (p == exe_name)
3850 {
3851 char_u *pend1;
3852 char_u *pend2;
3853
3854 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3855 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3856 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3857 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3858 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3859 if (pend2 == pend)
3860 pend = pend1;
3861 }
3862# endif
3863 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3864 if (p == exe_name)
3865 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3866#endif
3867
3868 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3869 if (!vimruntime)
3870 {
3871 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3872 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3873 }
3874
3875 /* remove trailing path separator */
3876#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3877 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3878 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003879 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003880 --pend;
3881#endif
3882
3883 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3884 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3885
3886 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3887 {
3888 vim_free(p);
3889 p = NULL;
3890 }
3891 else
3892 {
3893#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3894 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3895 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3896 {
3897 vim_free(p);
3898 p = pend;
3899 }
3900#endif
3901 *mustfree = TRUE;
3902 }
3903 }
3904 }
3905
3906#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3907 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3908 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3909 if (p == NULL)
3910 {
3911 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3912 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3913 {
3914 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3915 *mustfree = FALSE;
3916 }
3917 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3918 {
3919 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3920 *mustfree = TRUE;
3921 else
3922 {
3923 p = default_vim_dir;
3924 *mustfree = FALSE;
3925 }
3926 }
3927 }
3928#endif
3929
3930 /*
3931 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3932 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3933 */
3934 if (p != NULL)
3935 {
3936 if (vimruntime)
3937 {
3938 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3939 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3940#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3941 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003942 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003943
3944 if (buf != NULL)
3945 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003946 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3947 vim_free(buf);
3948 }
3949 }
3950#endif
3951 }
3952 else
3953 {
3954 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3955 didset_vim = TRUE;
3956 }
3957 }
3958 return p;
3959}
3960
3961/*
3962 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3963 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3964 */
3965 static char_u *
3966vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3967 char_u *vimdir;
3968{
3969 char_u *p;
3970
3971 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3972 return NULL;
3973 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3974 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3975 return p;
3976 vim_free(p);
3977 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3978 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3979 return p;
3980 vim_free(p);
3981 return NULL;
3982}
3983
3984/*
3985 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3986 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3987 */
3988 static char_u *
3989remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3990 char_u *p;
3991 char_u *pend;
3992 char_u *name;
3993{
3994 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3995 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3996
3997 if (newend >= p
3998 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003999 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004000 return newend;
4001 return pend;
4002}
4003
4004#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
4005/*
4006 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
4007 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
4008 */
4009 static char_u *
4010remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
4011 char_u *p;
4012 char_u *pend;
4013 char_u *ext;
4014{
4015 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
4016 char_u *newend = pend - len;
4017
4018 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00004019 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
4020 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
4021 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004022 return newend;
4023 return pend;
4024}
4025#endif
4026
4027/*
4028 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4029 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4030 * again soon.
4031 */
4032 char_u *
4033expand_env_save(src)
4034 char_u *src;
4035{
4036 char_u *p;
4037
4038 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4039 if (p != NULL)
4040 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4041 return p;
4042}
4043
4044/*
4045 * Our portable version of setenv.
4046 */
4047 void
4048vim_setenv(name, val)
4049 char_u *name;
4050 char_u *val;
4051{
4052#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4053 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4054#else
4055 char_u *envbuf;
4056
4057 /*
4058 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4059 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4060 */
4061 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4062 if (envbuf != NULL)
4063 {
4064 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4065 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4066 }
4067#endif
4068}
4069
4070#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4071/*
4072 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4073 */
4074/*ARGSUSED*/
4075 char_u *
4076get_env_name(xp, idx)
4077 expand_T *xp;
4078 int idx;
4079{
4080# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4081 /*
4082 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4083 */
4084 return NULL;
4085# else
4086# ifndef __WIN32__
4087 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4088 extern char **environ;
4089# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004090# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4091 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004092 char_u *str;
4093 int n;
4094
4095 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4096 if (str == NULL)
4097 return NULL;
4098
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004099 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004100 {
4101 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4102 break;
4103 name[n] = str[n];
4104 }
4105 name[n] = NUL;
4106 return name;
4107# endif
4108}
4109#endif
4110
4111/*
4112 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4113 * 'src'.
4114 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4115 */
4116 void
4117home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4118 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4119 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4120 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4121 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4122 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4123 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4124{
4125 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4126 size_t len;
4127 char_u *homedir_env;
4128 char_u *p;
4129
4130 if (src == NULL)
4131 {
4132 *dst = NUL;
4133 return;
4134 }
4135
4136 /*
4137 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4138 */
4139 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4140 {
4141 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4142 return;
4143 }
4144
4145 /*
4146 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4147 * "real" home directory.
4148 */
4149 if (homedir != NULL)
4150 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4151
4152#ifdef VMS
4153 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4154#else
4155 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4156#endif
4157
4158 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4159 homedir_env = NULL;
4160 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4161 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4162
4163 if (!one)
4164 src = skipwhite(src);
4165 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4166 {
4167 /*
4168 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4169 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4170 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4171 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4172 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4173 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4174 * er's home directory)).
4175 */
4176 p = homedir;
4177 len = dirlen;
4178 for (;;)
4179 {
4180 if ( len
4181 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4182 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4183 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4184 || src[len] == NUL))
4185 {
4186 src += len;
4187 if (--dstlen > 0)
4188 *dst++ = '~';
4189
4190 /*
4191 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4192 */
4193 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4194 *dst++ = '/';
4195 break;
4196 }
4197 if (p == homedir_env)
4198 break;
4199 p = homedir_env;
4200 len = envlen;
4201 }
4202
4203 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4204 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4205 *dst++ = *src++;
4206 /* skip separator */
4207 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4208 *dst++ = *src++;
4209 }
4210 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4211
4212 *dst = NUL;
4213}
4214
4215/*
4216 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4217 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4218 */
4219 char_u *
4220home_replace_save(buf, src)
4221 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4222 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4223{
4224 char_u *dst;
4225 unsigned len;
4226
4227 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4228 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4229 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4230 dst = alloc(len);
4231 if (dst != NULL)
4232 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4233 return dst;
4234}
4235
4236/*
4237 * Compare two file names and return:
4238 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4239 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4240 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4241 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4242 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4243 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4244 */
4245 int
4246fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4247 char_u *s1, *s2;
4248 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4249{
4250#ifdef UNIX
4251 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4252 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4253 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4254 struct stat st1, st2;
4255 int r1, r2;
4256
4257 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4258 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4259 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4260 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4261 {
4262 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4263 if (checkname)
4264 {
4265 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4266 return FPC_SAMEX;
4267 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4268 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4269 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4270 return FPC_SAMEX;
4271 }
4272 return FPC_NOTX;
4273 }
4274 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4275 return FPC_DIFFX;
4276 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4277 return FPC_SAME;
4278 return FPC_DIFF;
4279#else
4280 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4281 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4282 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4283 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4284 int r1, r2;
4285
4286 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4287 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4288 {
4289 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4290 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4291
4292 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4293 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4294 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4295
4296 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4297 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4298 {
4299 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4300 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4301 else
4302 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4303 }
4304 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4305 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4306 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4307 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4308 else
4309 retval = FPC_SAME;
4310 vim_free(exp1);
4311 }
4312 return retval;
4313#endif
4314}
4315
4316/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004317 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4318 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004319 */
4320 char_u *
4321gettail(fname)
4322 char_u *fname;
4323{
4324 char_u *p1, *p2;
4325
4326 if (fname == NULL)
4327 return (char_u *)"";
4328 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4329 {
4330 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4331 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004332 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004333 }
4334 return p1;
4335}
4336
4337/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004338 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4339 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4340 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4341 */
4342 char_u *
4343gettail_sep(fname)
4344 char_u *fname;
4345{
4346 char_u *p;
4347 char_u *t;
4348
4349 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4350 t = gettail(fname);
4351 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4352 --t;
4353#ifdef VMS
4354 /* path separator is part of the path */
4355 ++t;
4356#endif
4357 return t;
4358}
4359
4360/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004361 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4362 */
4363 char_u *
4364getnextcomp(fname)
4365 char_u *fname;
4366{
4367 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004368 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004369 if (*fname)
4370 ++fname;
4371 return fname;
4372}
4373
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004374/*
4375 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4376 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4377 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4378 */
4379 char_u *
4380get_past_head(path)
4381 char_u *path;
4382{
4383 char_u *retval;
4384
4385#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4386 /* may skip "c:" */
4387 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4388 retval = path + 2;
4389 else
4390 retval = path;
4391#else
4392# if defined(AMIGA)
4393 /* may skip "label:" */
4394 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4395 if (retval == NULL)
4396 retval = path;
4397# else /* Unix */
4398 retval = path;
4399# endif
4400#endif
4401
4402 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4403 ++retval;
4404
4405 return retval;
4406}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004407
4408/*
4409 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4410 */
4411 int
4412vim_ispathsep(c)
4413 int c;
4414{
4415#ifdef RISCOS
4416 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4417#else
4418# ifdef UNIX
4419 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4420# else
4421# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4422 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4423# else
4424# ifdef VMS
4425 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4426 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4427 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4428# else
4429# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4430 return (c == ':');
4431# else /* Amiga */
4432 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4433# endif
4434# endif /* VMS */
4435# endif
4436# endif
4437#endif /* RISC OS */
4438}
4439
4440#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4441/*
4442 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4443 */
4444 int
4445vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4446 int c;
4447{
4448#ifdef UNIX
4449 return (c == ':');
4450#else
4451 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4452#endif
4453}
4454#endif
4455
Bram Moolenaar900b4d72005-12-12 22:05:50 +00004456/*
4457 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4458 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4459 * "fname" must be writable!.
4460 */
4461 int
4462dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4463 char_u *fname;
4464{
4465 char_u *p;
4466 int c;
4467 int retval;
4468
4469 p = gettail_sep(fname);
4470 if (p == fname)
4471 return TRUE;
4472 c = *p;
4473 *p = NUL;
4474 retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4475 *p = c;
4476 return retval;
4477}
4478
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004479#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4480 || defined(PROTO)
4481/*
4482 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4483 */
4484 int
4485vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4486 char_u *x, *y;
4487{
4488 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4489}
4490
4491 int
4492vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4493 char_u *x, *y;
4494 size_t len;
4495{
4496 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4497 {
4498 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4499 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4500 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4501 break;
4502 ++x;
4503 ++y;
4504 --len;
4505 }
4506 if (len == 0)
4507 return 0;
4508 return (*x - *y);
4509}
4510#endif
4511
4512/*
4513 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4514 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4515 */
4516 char_u *
4517concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4518 char_u *fname1;
4519 char_u *fname2;
4520 int sep;
4521{
4522 char_u *dest;
4523
4524 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4525 if (dest != NULL)
4526 {
4527 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4528 if (sep)
4529 add_pathsep(dest);
4530 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4531 }
4532 return dest;
4533}
4534
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004535#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4536/*
4537 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4538 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4539 */
4540 char_u *
4541concat_str(str1, str2)
4542 char_u *str1;
4543 char_u *str2;
4544{
4545 char_u *dest;
4546 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4547
4548 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4549 if (dest != NULL)
4550 {
4551 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4552 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4553 }
4554 return dest;
4555}
4556#endif
4557
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004558/*
4559 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4560 * separator.
4561 */
4562 void
4563add_pathsep(p)
4564 char_u *p;
4565{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004566 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004567 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4568}
4569
4570/*
4571 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4572 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4573 */
4574 char_u *
4575FullName_save(fname, force)
4576 char_u *fname;
4577 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4578 like a full path name */
4579{
4580 char_u *buf;
4581 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4582
4583 if (fname == NULL)
4584 return NULL;
4585
4586 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4587 if (buf != NULL)
4588 {
4589 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4590 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4591 else
4592 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4593 vim_free(buf);
4594 }
4595 return new_fname;
4596}
4597
4598#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4599
4600static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4601
4602/*
4603 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4604 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4605 */
4606 pos_T *
4607find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4608 int ind_maxcomment;
4609{
4610 pos_T *pos;
4611 char_u *line;
4612 char_u *p;
4613
4614 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4615 return NULL;
4616
4617 /*
4618 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4619 */
4620 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4621 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4622 p = skip_string(p);
4623 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4624 return NULL;
4625 return pos;
4626}
4627
4628/*
4629 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4630 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4631 */
4632 static char_u *
4633skip_string(p)
4634 char_u *p;
4635{
4636 int i;
4637
4638 /*
4639 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4640 */
4641 for ( ; ; ++p)
4642 {
4643 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4644 {
4645 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4646 break;
4647 i = 2;
4648 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4649 {
4650 ++i;
4651 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4652 ++i;
4653 }
4654 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4655 {
4656 p += i;
4657 continue;
4658 }
4659 }
4660 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4661 {
4662 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4663 {
4664 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4665 ++p;
4666 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4667 break;
4668 }
4669 if (p[0] == '"')
4670 continue;
4671 }
4672 break; /* no string found */
4673 }
4674 if (!*p)
4675 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4676 return p;
4677}
4678#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4679
4680#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4681
4682/*
4683 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4684 */
4685 void
4686do_c_expr_indent()
4687{
4688# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4689 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4690 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4691 else
4692# endif
4693 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4694}
4695
4696/*
4697 * Functions for C-indenting.
4698 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4699 */
4700/*
4701 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4702 */
4703
4704static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4705static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4706static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4707static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4708static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4709static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4710static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4711static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4712static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4713static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4714static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4715static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4716static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4717static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4718static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4719static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4720static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4721static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4722static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4723static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4724static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4725static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4726static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4727static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4728static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4729static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4730static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4731static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4732static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4733static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4734
4735/*
4736 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4737 */
4738 static char_u *
4739cin_skipcomment(s)
4740 char_u *s;
4741{
4742 while (*s)
4743 {
4744 s = skipwhite(s);
4745 if (*s != '/')
4746 break;
4747 ++s;
4748 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4749 {
4750 s += STRLEN(s);
4751 break;
4752 }
4753 if (*s != '*')
4754 break;
4755 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4756 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4757 {
4758 s += 2;
4759 break;
4760 }
4761 }
4762 return s;
4763}
4764
4765/*
4766 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4767 * not considered code.
4768 */
4769 static int
4770cin_nocode(s)
4771 char_u *s;
4772{
4773 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4774}
4775
4776/*
4777 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4778 */
4779 static pos_T *
4780find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4781{
4782 static pos_T pos;
4783 char_u *line;
4784 char_u *p;
4785
4786 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4787 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4788 {
4789 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4790 p = skipwhite(line);
4791 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4792 {
4793 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4794 return &pos;
4795 }
4796 if (*p != NUL)
4797 break;
4798 }
4799 return NULL;
4800}
4801
4802/*
4803 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4804 */
4805 static int
4806cin_islabel_skip(s)
4807 char_u **s;
4808{
4809 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4810 return FALSE;
4811
4812 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4813 (*s)++;
4814
4815 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4816
4817 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4818 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4819}
4820
4821/*
4822 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4823 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4824 */
4825 int
4826cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4827 int ind_maxcomment;
4828{
4829 char_u *s;
4830
4831 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4832
4833 /*
4834 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4835 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4836 */
4837 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4838 return FALSE;
4839 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4840 return FALSE;
4841
4842 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4843 {
4844 /*
4845 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4846 * label.
4847 */
4848 pos_T cursor_save;
4849 pos_T *trypos;
4850 char_u *line;
4851
4852 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4853 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4854 {
4855 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4856
4857 /*
4858 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4859 */
4860 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4861 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4862 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4863
4864 line = ml_get_curline();
4865 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4866 continue;
4867 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4868 continue;
4869
4870 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4871 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4872 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4873 || cin_iscase(line)
4874 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4875 return TRUE;
4876 return FALSE;
4877 }
4878 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4879 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4880 }
4881 return FALSE;
4882}
4883
4884/*
4885 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4886 * Q&D-Implementation:
4887 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4888 */
4889 static int
4890cin_isinit(void)
4891{
4892 char_u *s;
4893
4894 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4895
4896 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4897 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4898
4899 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4900 return TRUE;
4901
4902 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4903 return TRUE;
4904
4905 return FALSE;
4906}
4907
4908/*
4909 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4910 */
4911 int
4912cin_iscase(s)
4913 char_u *s;
4914{
4915 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4916 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4917 {
4918 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4919 {
4920 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4921 if (*s == ':')
4922 {
4923 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4924 ++s;
4925 else
4926 return TRUE;
4927 }
4928 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4929 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4930 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4931 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4932 else if (*s == '"')
4933 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4934 }
4935 return FALSE;
4936 }
4937
4938 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4939 return TRUE;
4940 return FALSE;
4941}
4942
4943/*
4944 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4945 */
4946 static int
4947cin_isdefault(s)
4948 char_u *s;
4949{
4950 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4951 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4952 && s[1] != ':');
4953}
4954
4955/*
4956 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4957 */
4958 int
4959cin_isscopedecl(s)
4960 char_u *s;
4961{
4962 int i;
4963
4964 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4965 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4966 i = 6;
4967 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4968 i = 9;
4969 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4970 i = 7;
4971 else
4972 return FALSE;
4973 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4974}
4975
4976/*
4977 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4978 * Return NULL if not found.
4979 * case 234: a = b;
4980 * ^
4981 */
4982 static char_u *
4983after_label(l)
4984 char_u *l;
4985{
4986 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4987 {
4988 if (*l == ':')
4989 {
4990 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4991 ++l;
4992 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4993 break;
4994 }
4995 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4996 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4997 }
4998 if (*l == NUL)
4999 return NULL;
5000 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
5001 if (*l == NUL)
5002 return NULL;
5003 return l;
5004}
5005
5006/*
5007 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
5008 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
5009 */
5010 static int
5011get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
5012 linenr_T lnum;
5013{
5014 char_u *l;
5015 pos_T fp;
5016 colnr_T col;
5017 char_u *p;
5018
5019 l = ml_get(lnum);
5020 p = after_label(l);
5021 if (p == NULL)
5022 return 0;
5023
5024 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5025 fp.lnum = lnum;
5026 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5027 return (int)col;
5028}
5029
5030/*
5031 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5032 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5033 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5034 * ^
5035 */
5036 static int
5037skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5038 linenr_T lnum;
5039 char_u **pp;
5040 int ind_maxcomment;
5041{
5042 char_u *l;
5043 int amount;
5044 pos_T cursor_save;
5045
5046 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5047 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5048 l = ml_get_curline();
5049 /* XXX */
5050 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5051 {
5052 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5053 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5054 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
5055 l = ml_get_curline();
5056 }
5057 else
5058 {
5059 amount = get_indent();
5060 l = ml_get_curline();
5061 }
5062 *pp = l;
5063
5064 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5065 return amount;
5066}
5067
5068/*
5069 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5070 * int a, indent of "a"
5071 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
5072 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5073 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5074 */
5075 static int
5076cin_first_id_amount()
5077{
5078 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5079 int len;
5080 pos_T fp;
5081 colnr_T col;
5082
5083 line = ml_get_curline();
5084 p = skipwhite(line);
5085 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5086 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5087 {
5088 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5089 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5090 }
5091 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5092 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5093 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5094 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5095 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5096 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5097 {
5098 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5099 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5100 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5101 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5102 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5103 p = s;
5104 }
5105 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5106 ;
5107 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5108 return 0;
5109
5110 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5111 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5112 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5113 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5114 return (int)col;
5115}
5116
5117/*
5118 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5119 * char *foo = "here";
5120 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5121 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5122 * foo = "asdf\
5123 * asdf\
5124 * here";
5125 */
5126 static int
5127cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5128 linenr_T lnum;
5129{
5130 char_u *line;
5131 char_u *s;
5132 colnr_T col;
5133 pos_T fp;
5134
5135 if (lnum > 1)
5136 {
5137 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5138 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5139 return -1;
5140 }
5141
5142 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5143 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5144 {
5145 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5146 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5147 else
5148 ++s;
5149 }
5150 if (*s != '=')
5151 return 0;
5152
5153 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5154 if (cin_nocode(s))
5155 return 0;
5156
5157 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5158 ++s;
5159
5160 fp.lnum = lnum;
5161 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5162 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5163 return (int)col;
5164}
5165
5166/*
5167 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5168 */
5169 static int
5170cin_ispreproc(s)
5171 char_u *s;
5172{
5173 s = skipwhite(s);
5174 if (*s == '#')
5175 return TRUE;
5176 return FALSE;
5177}
5178
5179/*
5180 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5181 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5182 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5183 */
5184 static int
5185cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5186 char_u **pp;
5187 linenr_T *lnump;
5188{
5189 char_u *line = *pp;
5190 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5191 int retval = FALSE;
5192
Bram Moolenaard8e9bb22005-07-09 21:14:46 +00005193 for (;;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005194 {
5195 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5196 {
5197 retval = TRUE;
5198 *lnump = lnum;
5199 break;
5200 }
5201 if (lnum == 1)
5202 break;
5203 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5204 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5205 break;
5206 }
5207
5208 if (lnum != *lnump)
5209 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5210 return retval;
5211}
5212
5213/*
5214 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5215 */
5216 static int
5217cin_iscomment(p)
5218 char_u *p;
5219{
5220 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5221}
5222
5223/*
5224 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5225 */
5226 static int
5227cin_islinecomment(p)
5228 char_u *p;
5229{
5230 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5231}
5232
5233/*
5234 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5235 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5236 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5237 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5238 */
5239 static int
5240cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5241 char_u *s;
5242 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5243 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5244{
5245 char_u found_start = 0;
5246
5247 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5248
5249 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5250 found_start = *s;
5251
5252 while (*s)
5253 {
5254 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5255 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5256 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5257 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5258 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5259 return *s;
5260
5261 if (*s)
5262 s++;
5263 }
5264 return found_start;
5265}
5266
5267/*
5268 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5269 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5270 * no semicolons anywhere.
5271 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5272 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5273 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5274 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5275 */
5276 static int
5277cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5278 char_u **sp;
5279 linenr_T first_lnum;
5280{
5281 char_u *s;
5282 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5283 int retval = FALSE;
5284
5285 if (sp == NULL)
5286 s = ml_get(lnum);
5287 else
5288 s = *sp;
5289
5290 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5291 {
5292 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5293 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5294 else
5295 ++s;
5296 }
5297 if (*s != '(')
5298 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5299
5300 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5301 {
5302 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5303 {
5304 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5305 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5306 * #if defined(x) && \
5307 * defined(y)
5308 */
5309 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5310 s = ml_get(lnum);
5311 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5312 retval = TRUE;
5313 goto done;
5314 }
5315 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5316 {
5317 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5318 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5319 break;
5320
5321 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5322 }
5323 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5324 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5325 else
5326 ++s;
5327 }
5328
5329done:
5330 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5331 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5332
5333 return retval;
5334}
5335
5336 static int
5337cin_isif(p)
5338 char_u *p;
5339{
5340 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5341}
5342
5343 static int
5344cin_iselse(p)
5345 char_u *p;
5346{
5347 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5348 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5349 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5350}
5351
5352 static int
5353cin_isdo(p)
5354 char_u *p;
5355{
5356 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5357}
5358
5359/*
5360 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5361 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5362 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5363 */
5364 static int
5365cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5366 char_u *p;
5367 linenr_T lnum;
5368 int ind_maxparen;
5369{
5370 pos_T cursor_save;
5371 pos_T *trypos;
5372 int retval = FALSE;
5373
5374 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5375 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5376 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5377 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5378 {
5379 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5380 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5381 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5382 p = ml_get_curline();
5383 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5384 {
5385 ++p;
5386 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5387 }
5388 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5389 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5390 retval = TRUE;
5391 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5392 }
5393 return retval;
5394}
5395
5396 static int
5397cin_isbreak(p)
5398 char_u *p;
5399{
5400 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5401}
5402
5403/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5404 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5405 *
5406 * class MyClass :
5407 * baseClass <-- here
5408 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5409 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5410 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5411 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5412 */
5413 static int
5414cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5415 char_u *line;
5416 colnr_T *col;
5417{
5418 char_u *s;
5419 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5420
5421 *col = 0;
5422
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005423 s = skipwhite(line);
5424 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5425 return FALSE;
5426 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005427 if (*s == NUL)
5428 return FALSE;
5429
5430 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5431
5432 while(*s != NUL)
5433 {
5434 if (s[0] == ':')
5435 {
5436 if (s[1] == ':')
5437 {
5438 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5439 * initialization any more */
5440 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5441 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5442 }
5443 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5444 {
5445 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5446 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5447 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5448 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5449 *col = 0;
5450 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5451 }
5452 else
5453 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5454 }
5455 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5456 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5457 {
5458 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5459 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5460
5461 if (*s == 'c')
5462 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5463 else
5464 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5465 }
5466 else
5467 {
5468 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5469 {
5470 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5471 }
5472 else if (s[0] == ')')
5473 {
5474 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5475 * something like "):" */
5476 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5477 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5478 }
5479 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5480 {
5481 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5482 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5483 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5484 }
5485 else if (*col == 0)
5486 {
5487 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5488 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5489
5490 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5491 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5492 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5493 }
5494
5495 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5496 }
5497 }
5498
5499 return cpp_base_class;
5500}
5501
5502/*
5503 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5504 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5505 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5506 */
5507 static int
5508cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5509 char_u *s;
5510 char_u *find;
5511 char_u *ignore;
5512{
5513 char_u *p = s;
5514 char_u *r;
5515 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5516
5517 while (*p != NUL)
5518 {
5519 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5520 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5521 {
5522 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5523 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5524 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5525 if (cin_nocode(r))
5526 return TRUE;
5527 }
5528 if (*p != NUL)
5529 ++p;
5530 }
5531 return FALSE;
5532}
5533
5534/*
5535 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5536 * Return the column found.
5537 */
5538 static int
5539cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5540 pos_T *trypos;
5541{
5542 char_u *line;
5543 char_u *p;
5544
5545 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5546 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5547 {
5548 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5549 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5550 else
5551 {
5552 p = skip_string(p);
5553 ++p;
5554 }
5555 }
5556 return (int)(p - line);
5557}
5558
5559/*
5560 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5561 * Return NULL if no match found.
5562 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5563 * work. */
5564/* foo() */
5565/* { */
5566/* } */
5567
5568 static pos_T *
5569find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5570 int ind_maxcomment;
5571{
5572 pos_T cursor_save;
5573 pos_T *trypos;
5574 pos_T *pos;
5575 static pos_T pos_copy;
5576
5577 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5578 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5579 {
5580 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5581 trypos = &pos_copy;
5582 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5583 pos = NULL;
5584 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5585 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5586 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5587 break;
5588 if (pos != NULL)
5589 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5590 }
5591 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5592 return trypos;
5593}
5594
5595/*
5596 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5597 * Return NULL of no match found.
5598 */
5599 static pos_T *
5600find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5601 int ind_maxparen;
5602 int ind_maxcomment;
5603{
5604 pos_T cursor_save;
5605 pos_T *trypos;
5606 static pos_T pos_copy;
5607
5608 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5609 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5610 {
5611 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5612 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5613 trypos = NULL;
5614 else
5615 {
5616 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5617 trypos = &pos_copy;
5618 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5619 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5620 trypos = NULL;
5621 }
5622 }
5623 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5624 return trypos;
5625}
5626
5627/*
5628 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5629 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5630 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5631 * looking a few lines further.
5632 */
5633 static int
5634corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5635 int ind_maxparen;
5636 pos_T *startpos;
5637{
5638 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5639
5640 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5641 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5642 return ind_maxparen;
5643}
5644
5645/*
5646 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5647 * line "l".
5648 */
5649 static int
5650find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5651 char_u *l;
5652 int start, end;
5653{
5654 int i;
5655 int retval = FALSE;
5656 int open_count = 0;
5657
5658 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5659
5660 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5661 {
5662 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5663 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5664 if (l[i] == start)
5665 ++open_count;
5666 else if (l[i] == end)
5667 {
5668 if (open_count > 0)
5669 --open_count;
5670 else
5671 {
5672 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5673 retval = TRUE;
5674 }
5675 }
5676 }
5677 return retval;
5678}
5679
5680 int
5681get_c_indent()
5682{
5683 /*
5684 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5685 * block should be
5686 */
5687 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5688
5689 /*
5690 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5691 * line is imagined to be.
5692 */
5693 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5694
5695 /*
5696 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5697 * an opening brace.
5698 */
5699 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5700
5701 /*
5702 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5703 */
5704 int ind_first_open = 0;
5705
5706 /*
5707 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5708 * located
5709 */
5710 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5711
5712 /*
5713 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5714 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5715 * brace should be located
5716 */
5717 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5718
5719 /*
5720 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5721 * column is imagined to be
5722 */
5723 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5724
5725 /*
5726 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5727 */
5728 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5729
5730 /*
5731 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5732 */
5733 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5734
5735 /*
5736 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5737 */
5738 int ind_case_break = 0;
5739
5740 /*
5741 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5742 * should be located
5743 */
5744 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5745
5746 /*
5747 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5748 */
5749 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5750
5751 /*
5752 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5753 */
5754 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5755
5756 /*
5757 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5758 */
5759 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5760
5761 /*
5762 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5763 * should be indented
5764 */
5765 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5766
5767 /*
5768 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5769 * should be located
5770 */
5771 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5772
5773 /*
5774 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5775 */
5776 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5777
5778 /*
5779 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5780 * itself is also unclosed
5781 */
5782 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5783
5784 /*
5785 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5786 * unclosed parentheses.
5787 */
5788 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5789
5790 /*
5791 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5792 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5793 * context (for very long lines).
5794 */
5795 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5796
5797 /*
5798 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5799 * an unclosed parentheses.
5800 */
5801 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5802
5803 /*
5804 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5805 * opening parentheses.
5806 */
5807 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5808
5809 /*
5810 * Extra indent for comments.
5811 */
5812 int ind_comment = 0;
5813
5814 /*
5815 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5816 */
5817 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5818
5819 /*
5820 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5821 * after the comment opener.
5822 */
5823 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5824
5825 /*
5826 * max lines to search for an open paren
5827 */
5828 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5829
5830 /*
5831 * max lines to search for an open comment
5832 */
5833 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5834
5835 /*
5836 * handle braces for java code
5837 */
5838 int ind_java = 0;
5839
5840 /*
5841 * handle blocked cases correctly
5842 */
5843 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5844
5845 pos_T cur_curpos;
5846 int amount;
5847 int scope_amount;
5848 int cur_amount;
5849 colnr_T col;
5850 char_u *theline;
5851 char_u *linecopy;
5852 pos_T *trypos;
5853 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5854 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5855 char_u *start;
5856 int start_brace;
5857#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5858#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5859#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5860 linenr_T ourscope;
5861 char_u *l;
5862 char_u *look;
5863 char_u terminated;
5864 int lookfor;
5865#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5866#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5867#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5868#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5869#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5870#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5871#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5872#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5873#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5874#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5875#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5876
5877 int whilelevel;
5878 linenr_T lnum;
5879 char_u *options;
5880 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5881 int divider;
5882 int n;
5883 int iscase;
5884 int lookfor_break;
5885 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5886
5887 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5888 {
5889 l = options++;
5890 if (*options == '-')
5891 ++options;
5892 n = getdigits(&options);
5893 divider = 0;
5894 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5895 {
5896 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5897 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5898 {
5899 ++options;
5900 if (divider)
5901 divider *= 10;
5902 else
5903 divider = 10;
5904 }
5905 }
5906 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5907 {
5908 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5909 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5910 else
5911 {
5912 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5913 if (divider)
5914 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5915 }
5916 ++options;
5917 }
5918 if (l[1] == '-')
5919 n = -n;
5920 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5921 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5922 switch (*l)
5923 {
5924 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5925 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5926 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5927 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5928 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5929 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5930 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5931 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5932 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5933 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5934 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5935 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5936 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5937 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5938 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5939 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5940 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5941 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5942 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5943 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5944 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5945 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5946 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5947 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5948 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5949 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5950 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5951 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5952 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5953 }
5954 }
5955
5956 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5957 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5958
5959 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5960 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5961 * ml_get is valid! */
5962 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5963 if (linecopy == NULL)
5964 return 0;
5965
5966 /*
5967 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5968 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5969 * inserting new stuff.
5970 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5971 * check for that.
5972 */
5973 if ((State & INSERT)
5974 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5975 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5976 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5977
5978 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5979
5980 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5981
5982 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5983
5984 /*
5985 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5986 */
5987 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5988 {
5989 amount = 0;
5990 }
5991
5992 /*
5993 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5994 */
5995 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5996 {
5997 amount = 0;
5998 }
5999
6000 /*
6001 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
6002 * previous line, lineup with that one.
6003 */
6004 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
6005 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
6006 {
6007 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6008 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6009 amount = col;
6010 }
6011
6012 /*
6013 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6014 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6015 */
6016 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6017 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6018 {
6019 int lead_start_len = 2;
6020 int lead_middle_len = 1;
6021 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
6022 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
6023 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
6024 char_u *p;
6025 int start_align = 0;
6026 int start_off = 0;
6027 int done = FALSE;
6028
6029 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6030 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6031 amount = col;
6032
6033 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6034 while (*p != NUL)
6035 {
6036 int align = 0;
6037 int off = 0;
6038 int what = 0;
6039
6040 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6041 {
6042 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6043 what = *p++;
6044 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6045 align = *p++;
6046 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6047 off = getdigits(&p);
6048 else
6049 ++p;
6050 }
6051
6052 if (*p == ':')
6053 ++p;
6054 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6055 if (what == COM_START)
6056 {
6057 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6058 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6059 start_off = off;
6060 start_align = align;
6061 }
6062 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6063 {
6064 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6065 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6066 }
6067 else if (what == COM_END)
6068 {
6069 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6070 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6071 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6072 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6073 {
6074 done = TRUE;
6075 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6076 {
6077 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6078 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6079 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6080 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6081 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6082 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6083 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6084 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6085 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6086 {
6087 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6088 break;
6089 }
6090 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6091 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6092 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6093 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6094 continue;
6095 }
6096 if (start_off != 0)
6097 amount += start_off;
6098 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006099 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6100 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006101 break;
6102 }
6103
6104 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6105 * with the middle comment */
6106 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6107 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6108 {
6109 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6110 /* XXX */
6111 if (off != 0)
6112 amount += off;
6113 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006114 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6115 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006116 done = TRUE;
6117 break;
6118 }
6119 }
6120 }
6121
6122 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6123 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6124 * with the first character of the comment text.
6125 */
6126 if (done)
6127 ;
6128 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6129 amount += 1;
6130 else
6131 {
6132 /*
6133 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6134 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6135 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6136 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6137 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6138 */
6139 amount = -1;
6140 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6141 {
6142 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6143 continue;
6144 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6145 break;
6146 }
6147 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6148 {
6149 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6150 {
6151 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6152 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6153 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6154 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6155 }
6156 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6157 amount = col;
6158 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6159 amount += ind_in_comment;
6160 }
6161 }
6162 }
6163
6164 /*
6165 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6166 */ /* XXX */
6167 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6168 && ind_java == 0)
6169 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6170 || trypos != NULL)
6171 {
6172 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6173 {
6174 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6175 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6176 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6177 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6178 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6179 trypos = NULL;
6180 else
6181 tryposBrace = NULL;
6182 }
6183
6184 if (trypos != NULL)
6185 {
6186 /*
6187 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6188 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6189 */
6190 amount = -1;
6191 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6192 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6193 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6194 {
6195 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6196 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6197 continue;
6198 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6199 continue;
6200 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6201
6202 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6203 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6204 {
6205 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6206 continue;
6207 }
6208
6209 /* XXX */
6210 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6211 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6212 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6213 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6214 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6215 {
6216 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6217
6218 if (theline[0] == ')')
6219 {
6220 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6221 cur_amount = amount;
6222 amount = -1;
6223 }
6224 break;
6225 }
6226 }
6227
6228 /*
6229 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6230 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6231 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6232 */
6233 if (amount == -1)
6234 {
6235 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6236 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6237 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6238 {
6239 /*
6240 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6241 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6242 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6243 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6244 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6245 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6246 * lines).
6247 */
6248 if (theline[0] != ')')
6249 {
6250 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6251 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6252 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6253 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6254 {
6255 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6256 * for each additional level */
6257 n = 1;
6258 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6259 {
6260 switch (l[col])
6261 {
6262 case '(':
6263 case '{': ++n;
6264 break;
6265
6266 case ')':
6267 case '}': if (n > 1)
6268 --n;
6269 break;
6270 }
6271 }
6272
6273 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6274 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6275 }
6276 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6277 our_paren_pos.col++;
6278 else
6279 {
6280 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6281 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6282 col++;
6283 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6284 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6285 else
6286 our_paren_pos.col++;
6287 }
6288 }
6289
6290 /*
6291 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6292 * if we did the above "if".
6293 */
6294 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6295 {
6296 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6297 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6298 cur_amount = col;
6299 }
6300 }
6301
6302 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6303 {
6304 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6305 }
6306 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6307 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6308 {
6309 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6310 amount = cur_amount;
6311 }
6312 else
6313 {
6314 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6315 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6316 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6317 {
6318 --our_paren_pos.col;
6319 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6320 {
6321 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6322 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6323 break;
6324 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6325 col = MAXCOL;
6326 break;
6327 }
6328 }
6329
6330 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6331 * braces */
6332 if (col == MAXCOL)
6333 amount += ind_unclosed;
6334 else
6335 {
6336 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6337 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6338 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6339 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6340 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6341 else
6342 amount += ind_unclosed;
6343 }
6344 /*
6345 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6346 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6347 * lines:
6348 * func_long_name( if (x
6349 * arg && yy
6350 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6351 */
6352 if (cur_amount < amount)
6353 amount = cur_amount;
6354 }
6355 }
6356
6357 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6358 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6359 amount += ind_comment;
6360 }
6361
6362 /*
6363 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6364 */
6365 else
6366 {
6367 trypos = tryposBrace;
6368
6369 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6370 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6371
6372 /*
6373 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6374 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6375 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6376 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6377 */
6378 look = skipwhite(start);
6379 if (*look == '{')
6380 {
6381 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6382 amount = col;
6383 if (*start == '{')
6384 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6385 else
6386 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6387 }
6388 else
6389 {
6390 /*
6391 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6392 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6393 */
6394 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6395
6396 /*
6397 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6398 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6399 */
6400 lnum = ourscope;
6401 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6402 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6403 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6404 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6405
6406 /*
6407 * It could have been something like
6408 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6409 * ldfd) {
6410 * }
6411 */
6412 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6413 amount = get_indent();
6414 else
6415 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6416
6417 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6418 }
6419
6420 /*
6421 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6422 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6423 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6424 */
6425 if (theline[0] == '}')
6426 {
6427 /*
6428 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6429 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6430 */
6431 amount += ind_close_extra;
6432 }
6433 else
6434 {
6435 /*
6436 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6437 * to match it with.
6438 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6439 * to match it with.
6440 */
6441 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6442 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6443 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6444 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6445 /* XXX */
6446 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6447 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6448 {
6449 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6450 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6451 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6452 {
6453 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6454 goto theend;
6455 }
6456 }
6457
6458 /*
6459 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6460 * failed to find a matching "if").
6461 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6462 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6463 */
6464
6465 /*
6466 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6467 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6468 * location for ind_open_extra.
6469 */
6470
6471 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6472 {
6473 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6474 }
6475 else
6476 {
6477 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6478 amount += ind_open_imag;
6479 else
6480 {
6481 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6482 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6483 if (amount < 0)
6484 amount = 0;
6485 }
6486 }
6487
6488 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6489
6490 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6491 {
6492 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6493 amount += ind_case;
6494 }
6495 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6496 {
6497 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6498 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6499 }
6500 else
6501 {
6502 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6503 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6504
6505 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6506 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6507 }
6508 scope_amount = amount;
6509 whilelevel = 0;
6510
6511 /*
6512 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6513 * with that.
6514 *
6515 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6516 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6517 * that opens the block.
6518 */
6519 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6520 for (;;)
6521 {
6522 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6523 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6524
6525 /*
6526 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6527 * up with it.
6528 */
6529 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6530 {
6531 /* we reached end of scope:
6532 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6533 * go further back:
6534 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6535 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6536 * declaration:
6537 * int x,
6538 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6539 */
6540 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6541 {
6542 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6543 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6544 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6545 {
6546 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6547 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6548 * initialization) */
6549 if (cont_amount > 0)
6550 amount = cont_amount;
6551 else
6552 amount += ind_continuation;
6553 break;
6554 }
6555
6556 l = ml_get_curline();
6557
6558 /*
6559 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6560 * comment.
6561 */
6562 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6563 if (trypos != NULL)
6564 {
6565 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6566 continue;
6567 }
6568
6569 /*
6570 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6571 */
6572 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6573 continue;
6574
6575 if (cin_nocode(l))
6576 continue;
6577
6578 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6579
6580 /*
6581 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6582 * function declaration, we are done
6583 * (it's a variable declaration).
6584 */
6585 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6586 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6587 {
6588 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6589 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6590 * don't add extra indent.
6591 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6592 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6593 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6594 */
6595 if (terminated == ',')
6596 break;
6597
6598 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6599 * we are done.
6600 */
6601 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6602 break;
6603
6604 /* nothing useful found */
6605 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6606 continue;
6607 }
6608
6609 if (terminated != ';')
6610 {
6611 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6612 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6613 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6614 */ /* XXX */
6615 trypos = NULL;
6616 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6617 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6618 ind_maxcomment);
6619
6620 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6621 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6622
6623 if (trypos != NULL)
6624 {
6625 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6626 continue;
6627 }
6628 }
6629
6630 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6631 * like in
6632 * int a,
6633 * b;
6634 */
6635 if (cont_amount > 0)
6636 amount = cont_amount;
6637 else
6638 amount += ind_continuation;
6639 }
6640 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6641 {
6642 if (cont_amount > 0)
6643 amount = cont_amount;
6644 else
6645 amount += ind_continuation;
6646 }
6647 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6648 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6649 {
6650 amount = scope_amount;
6651 if (theline[0] == '{')
6652 amount += ind_open_extra;
6653 }
6654 break;
6655 }
6656
6657 /*
6658 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6659 */ /* XXX */
6660 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6661 {
6662 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6663 continue;
6664 }
6665
6666 l = ml_get_curline();
6667
6668 /*
6669 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6670 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6671 */
6672 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6673 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6674 {
6675 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6676 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6677 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6678 break;
6679
6680 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6681 * labels. */
6682 if (whilelevel > 0)
6683 continue;
6684
6685 /*
6686 * case xx:
6687 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6688 *-> here;
6689 */
6690 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6691 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6692 {
6693 if (cont_amount > 0)
6694 amount = cont_amount;
6695 else
6696 amount += ind_continuation;
6697 break;
6698 }
6699
6700 /*
6701 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6702 * x = 333;
6703 * case yy:
6704 */
6705 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6706 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6707 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6708 {
6709 /*
6710 * Check that this case label is not for another
6711 * switch()
6712 */ /* XXX */
6713 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6714 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6715 {
6716 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6717 break;
6718 }
6719 continue;
6720 }
6721
6722 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6723
6724 /*
6725 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6726 * y = y + 1;
6727 * -> s = 99;
6728 *
6729 * case xx:
6730 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6731 * y = y + 1;
6732 * -> s = 99;
6733 */
6734 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6735 {
6736 if (n)
6737 amount = n;
6738
6739 if (!lookfor_break)
6740 break;
6741 }
6742
6743 /*
6744 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6745 * -> y = y + 1;
6746 *
6747 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6748 * -> y = y + 1;
6749 */
6750 if (n)
6751 {
6752 amount = n;
6753 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6754 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6755 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6756 break;
6757 }
6758
6759 /*
6760 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6761 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6762 * switch label.
6763 * break; <- may line up with this line
6764 * case xx:
6765 * -> y = 1;
6766 */
6767 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6768 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6769 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6770 continue;
6771 }
6772
6773 /*
6774 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6775 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6776 */
6777 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6778 {
6779 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6780 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6781 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6782 continue;
6783 }
6784
6785 /*
6786 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6787 */
6788 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6789 {
6790 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6791 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6792 continue;
6793 }
6794
6795 /*
6796 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6797 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6798 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6799 * unlocked it)
6800 */
6801 l = ml_get_curline();
6802 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6803 || cin_nocode(l))
6804 continue;
6805
6806 /*
6807 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6808 * constructor initialization?
6809 */ /* XXX */
6810 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6811 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6812 {
6813 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6814 {
6815 if (cont_amount > 0)
6816 amount = cont_amount;
6817 else
6818 amount += ind_continuation;
6819 }
6820 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6821 {
6822 amount = get_indent();
6823 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6824 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6825 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6826 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6827 if (theline[0] != '{')
6828 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6829 }
6830 else
6831 {
6832 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6833 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6834 amount = (int)col;
6835 }
6836 break;
6837 }
6838 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6839 {
6840 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6841 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6842 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6843 break;
6844 else
6845 continue;
6846 }
6847
6848 /*
6849 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6850 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6851 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6852 * 123,
6853 * sizeof
6854 * here
6855 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6856 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6857 * (indented).
6858 */
6859 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6860
6861 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6862 && terminated == ','))
6863 {
6864 /*
6865 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6866 * go back to the line that starts it so
6867 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6868 * if ( foo &&
6869 * bar )
6870 */
6871 /*
6872 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6873 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6874 */
6875 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6876 trypos = find_match_paren(
6877 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6878 ind_maxcomment);
6879
6880 /*
6881 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6882 * braces.
6883 */
6884 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6885 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6886
6887 if (trypos != NULL)
6888 {
6889 /*
6890 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6891 * handled above.
6892 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6893 * asdf)
6894 */
6895 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6896 l = ml_get_curline();
6897 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6898 {
6899 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6900 continue;
6901 }
6902 }
6903
6904 /*
6905 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6906 * indent from
6907 * char *usethis = "bla\
6908 * bla",
6909 * here;
6910 */
6911 if (terminated == ',')
6912 {
6913 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6914 {
6915 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6916 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6917 break;
6918 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6919 }
6920 }
6921
6922 /*
6923 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6924 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6925 */
6926 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6927 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6928
6929 /*
6930 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6931 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6932 * while (not)
6933 * -> {
6934 * }
6935 */
6936 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6937 && theline[0] == '{')
6938 {
6939 amount = cur_amount;
6940 /*
6941 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6942 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6943 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6944 * { 1, 2 },
6945 * -> { 3, 4 }
6946 */
6947 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6948 amount += ind_open_extra;
6949
6950 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6951 {
6952 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6953 * class declaration or initialization */
6954 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6955 continue;
6956 }
6957 break;
6958 }
6959
6960 /*
6961 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6962 * Also allow " } else".
6963 */
6964 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6965 {
6966 /*
6967 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6968 * with the last one.
6969 * if (cond)
6970 * 100 +
6971 * -> here;
6972 */
6973 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6974 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6975 {
6976 if (cont_amount > 0)
6977 amount = cont_amount;
6978 else
6979 amount += ind_continuation;
6980 break;
6981 }
6982
6983 /*
6984 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6985 * are finished.
6986 * while (not)
6987 * -> here;
6988 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6989 * before this is terminated.
6990 * yyy;
6991 * if (stat)
6992 * while (not)
6993 * xxx;
6994 * -> here;
6995 */
6996 amount = cur_amount;
6997 if (theline[0] == '{')
6998 amount += ind_open_extra;
6999 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7000 {
7001 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7002 break;
7003 }
7004
7005 /*
7006 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
7007 * do, line up with the while()
7008 * do
7009 * x = 1;
7010 * -> here
7011 */
7012 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7013 if (cin_isdo(l))
7014 {
7015 if (whilelevel == 0)
7016 break;
7017 --whilelevel;
7018 }
7019
7020 /*
7021 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7022 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7023 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
7024 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7025 */
7026 if (cin_iselse(l)
7027 && whilelevel == 0
7028 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7029 == NULL
7030 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7031 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7032 break;
7033 }
7034
7035 /*
7036 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7037 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7038 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7039 * the line before this one.
7040 */
7041 else
7042 {
7043 /*
7044 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7045 * the last one.
7046 * c = 99 +
7047 * 100 +
7048 * -> here;
7049 */
7050 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7051 {
7052 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7053 if (terminated == ',')
7054 amount += ind_continuation;
7055 break;
7056 }
7057
7058 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7059 {
7060 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7061 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7062 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7063 * opening brace or we are looking just for
7064 * enumerations/initializations. */
7065 if (terminated == ',')
7066 {
7067 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7068 break;
7069
7070 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7071 continue;
7072 }
7073
7074 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7075 * reduce indent. */
7076 if (amount > cur_amount)
7077 amount = cur_amount;
7078 }
7079 else
7080 {
7081 /*
7082 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7083 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7084 * 100 +
7085 * -> here;
7086 */
7087 amount = cur_amount;
7088
7089 /*
7090 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7091 * are in an initialization or enum
7092 * struct xxx =
7093 * {
7094 * sizeof a,
7095 * 124 };
7096 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7097 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7098 * yet.
7099 */
7100 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7101 {
7102 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7103 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7104 }
7105 else
7106 {
7107 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7108 && *l != NUL
7109 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7110 /* XXX */
7111 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7112 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7113 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7114 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7115 }
7116 }
7117 }
7118 }
7119
7120 /*
7121 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7122 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7123 */
7124 /* XXX */
7125 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7126 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7127 {
7128 /*
7129 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7130 * with the last one.
7131 * while (cond);
7132 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7133 * -> here;
7134 */
7135 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7136 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7137 {
7138 if (cont_amount > 0)
7139 amount = cont_amount;
7140 else
7141 amount += ind_continuation;
7142 break;
7143 }
7144
7145 if (whilelevel == 0)
7146 {
7147 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7148 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7149 if (theline[0] == '{')
7150 amount += ind_open_extra;
7151 }
7152 ++whilelevel;
7153 }
7154
7155 /*
7156 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7157 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7158 * indent of that other statement.
7159 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7160 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7161 */
7162 else
7163 {
7164 /*
7165 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7166 * may be lined up with the case label.
7167 */
7168 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7169 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7170 {
7171 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7172 continue;
7173 }
7174
7175 /*
7176 * Handle "do {" line.
7177 */
7178 if (whilelevel > 0)
7179 {
7180 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7181 if (cin_isdo(l))
7182 {
7183 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7184 --whilelevel;
7185 continue;
7186 }
7187 }
7188
7189 /*
7190 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7191 * the amount for a continuation line.
7192 * x = 1;
7193 * y = foo +
7194 * -> here;
7195 * or
7196 * int x = 1;
7197 * int foo,
7198 * -> here;
7199 */
7200 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7201 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7202 {
7203 if (cont_amount > 0)
7204 amount = cont_amount;
7205 else
7206 amount += ind_continuation;
7207 break;
7208 }
7209
7210 /*
7211 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7212 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7213 * x = 1; x = 1;
7214 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7215 * while (asdf) ->here;
7216 * here;
7217 * ->foo;
7218 */
7219 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7220 {
7221 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7222 break;
7223 }
7224
7225 /*
7226 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7227 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7228 * a terminated line.
7229 */
7230 else
7231 {
7232 /*
7233 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7234 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7235 * the line. Helps for:
7236 * func(asdr,
7237 * asdfasdf);
7238 * here;
7239 */
7240term_again:
7241 l = ml_get_curline();
7242 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7243 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7244 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7245 {
7246 /*
7247 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7248 * handled above.
7249 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7250 * asdf)
7251 */
7252 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7253 l = ml_get_curline();
7254 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7255 {
7256 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7257 continue;
7258 }
7259 }
7260
7261 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7262 * with a statement after it.
7263 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7264 * stat;
7265 * }
7266 * case 2:
7267 * stat;
7268 * }
7269 */
7270 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7271
7272 /*
7273 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7274 * ignoring any jump label.
7275 */
7276 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7277 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7278
7279 if (theline[0] == '{')
7280 amount += ind_open_extra;
7281 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7282 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7283 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7284 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7285
7286 /*
7287 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7288 * that block.
7289 */
7290 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7291 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7292 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7293 != NULL) /* XXX */
7294 {
7295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7296 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7297 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7298 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7299 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7300 goto term_again;
7301 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7302 }
7303 }
7304 }
7305 }
7306 }
7307 }
7308
7309 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7310 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7311 amount += ind_comment;
7312 }
7313
7314 /*
7315 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7316 *
7317 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7318 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7319 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7320 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7321 */
7322 else
7323 {
7324 /*
7325 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7326 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7327 * of a function
7328 */
7329
7330 if (theline[0] == '{')
7331 {
7332 amount = ind_first_open;
7333 }
7334
7335 /*
7336 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7337 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7338 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7339 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7340 */
7341 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7342 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7343 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7344 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7345 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7346 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7347 {
7348 amount = ind_func_type;
7349 }
7350 else
7351 {
7352 amount = 0;
7353 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7354
7355 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7356
7357 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7358 {
7359 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7360 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7361
7362 l = ml_get_curline();
7363
7364 /*
7365 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7366 */ /* XXX */
7367 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7368 {
7369 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7370 continue;
7371 }
7372
7373 /*
7374 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7375 * initialization?
7376 */ /* XXX */
7377 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7378 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7379 {
7380 if (col == 0)
7381 {
7382 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7383 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7384 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7385 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7386 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7387 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7388 }
7389 else
7390 {
7391 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7392 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7393 amount = (int)col;
7394 }
7395 break;
7396 }
7397
7398 /*
7399 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7400 */
7401 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7402 continue;
7403
7404 if (cin_nocode(l))
7405 continue;
7406
7407 /*
7408 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7409 * indentation:
7410 * int foo,
7411 * bar;
7412 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7413 * enum foobar
7414 * {
7415 * ...
7416 * } foo,
7417 * bar;
7418 */
7419 n = 0;
7420 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7421 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7422 {
7423 /* take us back to opening paren */
7424 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7425 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7426 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7427 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7428
7429 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7430 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7431 * char *foo = "bla\
7432 * bla",
7433 * here;
7434 */
7435 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7436 {
7437 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7438 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7439 break;
7440 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7441 }
7442
7443 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7444
7445 if (amount == 0)
7446 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7447 if (amount == 0)
7448 amount = ind_continuation;
7449 break;
7450 }
7451
7452 /*
7453 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7454 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7455 */
7456 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7457 break;
7458 l = ml_get_curline();
7459
7460 /*
7461 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7462 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7463 */
7464 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7465 break;
7466
7467 /* (matching {)
7468 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7469 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7470 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7471 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7472 */
7473 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7474 break;
7475
7476 /*
7477 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7478 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7479 * parameters.
7480 */
7481 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7482 {
7483 amount = ind_param;
7484 break;
7485 }
7486
7487 /*
7488 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7489 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7490 * int foo,
7491 * bar;
7492 * indent_to_0 here;
7493 */
7494 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7495 {
7496 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7497 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7498 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7499 break;
7500 l = ml_get_curline();
7501 }
7502
7503 /*
7504 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7505 * use the indent of this line.
7506 *
7507 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7508 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7509 */
7510 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7511
7512 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7513 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7514 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7515 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7516 break;
7517 }
7518
7519 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7520 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7521 amount += ind_comment;
7522
7523 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7524 * "asdfasdf\
7525 * here";
7526 * char *foo = "asdf\
7527 * here";
7528 */
7529 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7530 {
7531 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7532 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7533 {
7534 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7535 if (cur_amount > 0)
7536 amount = cur_amount;
7537 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7538 amount += ind_continuation;
7539 }
7540 }
7541 }
7542 }
7543
7544theend:
7545 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7546 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7547
7548 vim_free(linecopy);
7549
7550 if (amount < 0)
7551 return 0;
7552 return amount;
7553}
7554
7555 static int
7556find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7557 int lookfor;
7558 linenr_T ourscope;
7559 int ind_maxparen;
7560 int ind_maxcomment;
7561{
7562 char_u *look;
7563 pos_T *theirscope;
7564 char_u *mightbeif;
7565 int elselevel;
7566 int whilelevel;
7567
7568 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7569 {
7570 elselevel = 1;
7571 whilelevel = 0;
7572 }
7573 else
7574 {
7575 elselevel = 0;
7576 whilelevel = 1;
7577 }
7578
7579 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7580
7581 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7582 {
7583 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7584 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7585
7586 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7587 if (cin_iselse(look)
7588 || cin_isif(look)
7589 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7590 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7591 {
7592 /*
7593 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7594 * we must be out of scope...
7595 */
7596 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7597 if (theirscope == NULL)
7598 break;
7599
7600 /*
7601 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7602 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7603 * out of luck too.
7604 */
7605 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7606 break;
7607
7608 /*
7609 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7610 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7611 * different scope...
7612 */
7613 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7614 continue;
7615
7616 /*
7617 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7618 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7619 * increment elselevel
7620 */
7621 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7622 if (cin_iselse(look))
7623 {
7624 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7625 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7626 ++elselevel;
7627 continue;
7628 }
7629
7630 /*
7631 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7632 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7633 */
7634 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7635 {
7636 ++whilelevel;
7637 continue;
7638 }
7639
7640 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7641 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7642 if (cin_isif(look))
7643 {
7644 elselevel--;
7645 /*
7646 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7647 * get in the way.
7648 */
7649 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7650 whilelevel = 0;
7651 }
7652
7653 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7654 if (cin_isdo(look))
7655 whilelevel--;
7656
7657 /*
7658 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7659 * this must be the if that we want!
7660 * match the indent level of that if.
7661 */
7662 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7663 {
7664 return OK;
7665 }
7666 }
7667 }
7668 return FAIL;
7669}
7670
7671# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7672/*
7673 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7674 */
7675 int
7676get_expr_indent()
7677{
7678 int indent;
7679 pos_T pos;
7680 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaarb71eaae2006-01-20 23:10:18 +00007681 int use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007682
7683 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7684 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
Bram Moolenaarb71eaae2006-01-20 23:10:18 +00007685 if (use_sandbox)
7686 ++sandbox;
7687 ++textlock;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007688 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
Bram Moolenaarb71eaae2006-01-20 23:10:18 +00007689 if (use_sandbox)
7690 --sandbox;
7691 --textlock;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007692
7693 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7694 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7695 * command. */
7696 save_State = State;
7697 State = INSERT;
7698 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7699 check_cursor();
7700 State = save_State;
7701
7702 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7703 if (indent < 0)
7704 indent = get_indent();
7705
7706 return indent;
7707}
7708# endif
7709
7710#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7711
7712#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7713
7714static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7715
7716 static int
7717lisp_match(p)
7718 char_u *p;
7719{
7720 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7721 int len;
7722 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7723
7724 while (*word != NUL)
7725 {
7726 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7727 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7728 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7729 return TRUE;
7730 }
7731 return FALSE;
7732}
7733
7734/*
7735 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7736 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7737 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7738 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7739 *
7740 * TODO:
7741 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7742 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7743 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7744 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7745 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7746 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007747 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7748 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007749 */
7750 int
7751get_lisp_indent()
7752{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007753 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007754 int amount;
7755 char_u *that;
7756 colnr_T col;
7757 colnr_T firsttry;
7758 int parencount, quotecount;
7759 int vi_lisp;
7760
7761 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7762 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7763
7764 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7765 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7766
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007767 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7768 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7769 else
7770 {
7771 paren = *pos;
7772 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7773 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7774 pos = &paren;
7775 }
7776 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007777 {
7778 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7779 * line that is at the same () level. */
7780 amount = -1;
7781 parencount = 0;
7782
7783 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7784 {
7785 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7786 continue;
7787 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7788 {
7789 if (*that == ';')
7790 {
7791 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7792 ++that;
7793 continue;
7794 }
7795 if (*that == '\\')
7796 {
7797 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7798 ++that;
7799 continue;
7800 }
7801 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7802 {
7803 that++;
7804 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7805 ++that;
7806 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007807 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007808 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007809 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007810 --parencount;
7811 }
7812 if (parencount == 0)
7813 {
7814 amount = get_indent();
7815 break;
7816 }
7817 }
7818
7819 if (amount == -1)
7820 {
7821 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7822 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7823 col = pos->col;
7824
7825 that = ml_get_curline();
7826
7827 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7828 amount = 2;
7829 else
7830 {
7831 amount = 0;
7832 while (*that && col)
7833 {
7834 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7835 col--;
7836 }
7837
7838 /*
7839 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7840 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7841 *
7842 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7843 * (...)) of (...))
7844 */
7845
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007846 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7847 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007848 amount += 2;
7849 else
7850 {
7851 that++;
7852 amount++;
7853 firsttry = amount;
7854
7855 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7856 {
7857 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7858 ++that;
7859 }
7860
7861 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7862 {
7863 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7864 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007865 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007866 firsttry++;
7867
7868 parencount = 0;
7869 quotecount = 0;
7870
7871 if (vi_lisp
7872 || (*that != '"'
7873 && *that != '\''
7874 && *that != '#'
7875 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7876 {
7877 while (*that
7878 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7879 || quotecount
7880 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007881 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007882 && !quotecount
7883 && !parencount
7884 && vi_lisp)))
7885 {
7886 if (*that == '"')
7887 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007888 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7889 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007890 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007891 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7892 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007893 --parencount;
7894 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7895 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7896 (colnr_T)amount);
7897 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7898 (colnr_T)amount);
7899 }
7900 }
7901 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7902 {
7903 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7904 that++;
7905 }
7906 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7907 amount = firsttry;
7908 }
7909 }
7910 }
7911 }
7912 }
7913 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007914 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007915
7916 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7917
7918 return amount;
7919}
7920#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7921
7922 void
7923prepare_to_exit()
7924{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007925#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7926 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7927 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7928 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007929 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7930#endif
7931
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007932#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7933 if (gui.in_use)
7934 {
7935 gui.dying = TRUE;
7936 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7937 }
7938 else
7939#endif
7940 {
7941 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7942
7943 /*
7944 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7945 * screen (if there are two screens).
7946 */
7947 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7948#ifdef WIN3264
7949 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7950#endif
7951 stoptermcap();
7952 out_flush();
7953 }
7954}
7955
7956/*
7957 * Preserve files and exit.
7958 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7959 */
7960 void
7961preserve_exit()
7962{
7963 buf_T *buf;
7964
7965 prepare_to_exit();
7966
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00007967 /* Setting this will prevent free() calls. That avoids calling free()
7968 * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
7969 really_exiting = TRUE;
7970
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007971 out_str(IObuff);
7972 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7973 out_flush();
7974
7975 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7976
7977 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7978 {
7979 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7980 {
7981 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7982 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7983 out_flush();
7984 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7985 break;
7986 }
7987 }
7988
7989 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7990
7991 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7992
7993 getout(1);
7994}
7995
7996/*
7997 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7998 */
7999 int
8000vim_fexists(fname)
8001 char_u *fname;
8002{
8003 struct stat st;
8004
8005 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
8006 return FALSE;
8007 return TRUE;
8008}
8009
8010/*
8011 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
8012 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
8013 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
8014 * time, because it can be a system call.
8015 */
8016
8017#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8018# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8019# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8020# else
8021# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8022# endif
8023#endif
8024
8025static int breakcheck_count = 0;
8026
8027 void
8028line_breakcheck()
8029{
8030 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8031 {
8032 breakcheck_count = 0;
8033 ui_breakcheck();
8034 }
8035}
8036
8037/*
8038 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8039 */
8040 void
8041fast_breakcheck()
8042{
8043 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8044 {
8045 breakcheck_count = 0;
8046 ui_breakcheck();
8047 }
8048}
8049
8050/*
8051 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8052 * 'wildignore'.
8053 */
8054 int
8055expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8056 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8057 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8058 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8059 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8060 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
8061{
8062 int retval;
8063 int i, j;
8064 char_u *p;
8065 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
8066
8067 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8068
8069 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8070 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8071 return retval;
8072
8073#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8074 /*
8075 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8076 */
8077 if (*p_wig)
8078 {
8079 char_u *ffname;
8080
8081 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8082 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8083 {
8084 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8085 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8086 break;
8087# ifdef VMS
8088 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8089# endif
8090 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8091 {
8092 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8093 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8094 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8095 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8096 --*num_file;
8097 --i;
8098 }
8099 vim_free(ffname);
8100 }
8101 }
8102#endif
8103
8104 /*
8105 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8106 */
8107 if (*num_file > 1)
8108 {
8109 non_suf_match = 0;
8110 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8111 {
8112 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8113 {
8114 /*
8115 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8116 * of the list.
8117 */
8118 p = (*file)[i];
8119 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8120 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8121 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8122 }
8123 }
8124 }
8125
8126 return retval;
8127}
8128
8129/*
8130 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8131 */
8132 int
8133match_suffix(fname)
8134 char_u *fname;
8135{
8136 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8137 char_u *setsuf;
8138#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8139 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8140
8141 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8142 setsuflen = 0;
8143 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8144 {
8145 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8146 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8147 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8148 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8149 break;
8150 setsuflen = 0;
8151 }
8152 return (setsuflen != 0);
8153}
8154
8155#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8156
8157# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8158static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8159static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8160# endif
8161
8162# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8163/*
8164 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8165 * it's shared between these systems.
8166 */
8167# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8168# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8169# else
8170# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8171# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8172# endif
8173# endif
8174
8175/*
8176 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8177 */
8178 static int _cdecl
8179pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8180{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008181 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008182}
8183
8184# ifndef WIN3264
8185 static void
8186namelowcpy(
8187 char_u *d,
8188 char_u *s)
8189{
8190# ifdef DJGPP
8191 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8192 while (*s)
8193 *d++ = *s++;
8194 else
8195# endif
8196 while (*s)
8197 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8198 *d = NUL;
8199}
8200# endif
8201
8202/*
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008203 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8204 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008205 * Return the number of matches found.
8206 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8207 * at "path[wildoff]".
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008208 * Return the number of matches found.
8209 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008210 */
8211 static int
8212dos_expandpath(
8213 garray_T *gap,
8214 char_u *path,
8215 int wildoff,
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008216 int flags, /* EW_* flags */
8217 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008218{
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008219 char_u *buf;
8220 char_u *path_end;
8221 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8222 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8223 char_u *pat;
8224 regmatch_T regmatch;
8225 int starts_with_dot;
8226 int matches;
8227 int len;
8228 int starstar = FALSE;
8229 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008230#ifdef WIN3264
8231 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8232 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8233# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8234 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8235 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8236# endif
8237#else
8238 struct ffblk fb;
8239#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008240 char_u *matchname;
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008241 int ok;
8242
8243 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8244 if (stardepth > 0)
8245 {
8246 ui_breakcheck();
8247 if (got_int)
8248 return 0;
8249 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008250
8251 /* make room for file name */
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008252 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008253 if (buf == NULL)
8254 return 0;
8255
8256 /*
8257 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8258 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8259 */
8260 p = buf;
8261 s = buf;
8262 e = NULL;
8263 path_end = path;
8264 while (*path_end != NUL)
8265 {
8266 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8267 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8268 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8269 *p++ = *path_end++;
8270 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8271 {
8272 if (e != NULL)
8273 break;
8274 s = p + 1;
8275 }
8276 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8277 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8278 e = p;
8279#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8280 if (has_mbyte)
8281 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00008282 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008283 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8284 p += len;
8285 path_end += len;
8286 }
8287 else
8288#endif
8289 *p++ = *path_end++;
8290 }
8291 e = p;
8292 *e = NUL;
8293
8294 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8295 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8296 * component. */
8297 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8298 if (rem_backslash(p))
8299 {
8300 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8301 --e;
8302 --s;
8303 }
8304
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008305 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8306 for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8307 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8308 starstar = TRUE;
8309
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008310 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8311 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8312 if (pat == NULL)
8313 {
8314 vim_free(buf);
8315 return 0;
8316 }
8317
8318 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8319 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8320 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8321 vim_free(pat);
8322
8323 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8324 {
8325 vim_free(buf);
8326 return 0;
8327 }
8328
8329 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8330 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8331
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008332 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8333 * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8334 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8335 && *path_end == '/')
8336 {
8337 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8338 ++stardepth;
8339 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8340 --stardepth;
8341 }
8342
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008343 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8344 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8345#ifdef WIN3264
8346# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8347 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8348 {
8349 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8350 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8351 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8352 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8353 if (wn != NULL)
8354 {
8355 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8356 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8357 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8358 {
8359 vim_free(wn);
8360 wn = NULL;
8361 }
8362 }
8363 }
8364
8365 if (wn == NULL)
8366# endif
8367 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8368 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8369#else
8370 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8371 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8372 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8373#endif
8374
8375 while (ok)
8376 {
8377#ifdef WIN3264
8378# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8379 if (wn != NULL)
8380 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8381 else
8382# endif
8383 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8384#else
8385 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8386#endif
8387 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8388 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8389 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8390 && (matchname == NULL
8391 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8392 {
8393#ifdef WIN3264
8394 STRCPY(s, p);
8395#else
8396 namelowcpy(s, p);
8397#endif
8398 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008399
8400 if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8401 {
8402 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8403 * find matches. */
8404 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8405 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8406 ++stardepth;
8407 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8408 --stardepth;
8409 }
8410
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008411 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8412 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8413 {
8414 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8415 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008416 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008417 }
8418 else
8419 {
8420 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8421 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8422 if (*path_end != 0)
8423 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8424 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8425 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8426 }
8427 }
8428
8429#ifdef WIN3264
8430# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8431 if (wn != NULL)
8432 {
8433 vim_free(p);
8434 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8435 }
8436 else
8437# endif
8438 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8439#else
8440 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8441#endif
8442
8443 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8444 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8445 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8446 {
8447 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8448#ifdef WIN3264
8449 FindClose(hFind);
8450# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8451 if (wn != NULL)
8452 {
8453 vim_free(wn);
8454 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8455 if (wn != NULL)
8456 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8457 }
8458 if (wn == NULL)
8459# endif
8460 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8461 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8462#else
8463 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8464 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8465#endif
8466 vim_free(matchname);
8467 matchname = NULL;
8468 }
8469 }
8470
8471#ifdef WIN3264
8472 FindClose(hFind);
8473# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8474 vim_free(wn);
8475# endif
8476#endif
8477 vim_free(buf);
8478 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8479 vim_free(matchname);
8480
8481 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8482 if (matches > 0)
8483 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8484 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8485 return matches;
8486}
8487
8488 int
8489mch_expandpath(
8490 garray_T *gap,
8491 char_u *path,
8492 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8493{
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008494 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008495}
8496# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8497
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008498#if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8499 || defined(PROTO)
8500/*
8501 * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8502 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8503 */
8504static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8505
8506 static int
8507pstrcmp(a, b)
8508 const void *a, *b;
8509{
8510 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8511}
8512
8513/*
8514 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8515 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8516 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8517 * at "path + wildoff".
8518 * Return the number of matches found.
8519 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8520 */
8521 int
8522unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8523 garray_T *gap;
8524 char_u *path;
8525 int wildoff;
8526 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8527 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */
8528{
8529 char_u *buf;
8530 char_u *path_end;
8531 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8532 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8533 char_u *pat;
8534 regmatch_T regmatch;
8535 int starts_with_dot;
8536 int matches;
8537 int len;
8538 int starstar = FALSE;
8539 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */
8540
8541 DIR *dirp;
8542 struct dirent *dp;
8543
8544 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8545 if (stardepth > 0)
8546 {
8547 ui_breakcheck();
8548 if (got_int)
8549 return 0;
8550 }
8551
8552 /* make room for file name */
8553 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8554 if (buf == NULL)
8555 return 0;
8556
8557 /*
8558 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
8559 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
8560 */
8561 p = buf;
8562 s = buf;
8563 e = NULL;
8564 path_end = path;
8565 while (*path_end != NUL)
8566 {
8567 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8568 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8569 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8570 *p++ = *path_end++;
8571 else if (*path_end == '/')
8572 {
8573 if (e != NULL)
8574 break;
8575 s = p + 1;
8576 }
8577 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8578 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
8579 e = p;
8580#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8581 if (has_mbyte)
8582 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00008583 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008584 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8585 p += len;
8586 path_end += len;
8587 }
8588 else
8589#endif
8590 *p++ = *path_end++;
8591 }
8592 e = p;
8593 *e = NUL;
8594
8595 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
8596 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8597 * component. */
8598 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8599 if (rem_backslash(p))
8600 {
8601 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8602 --e;
8603 --s;
8604 }
8605
8606 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8607 for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8608 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8609 starstar = TRUE;
8610
8611 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
8612 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8613 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8614 if (pat == NULL)
8615 {
8616 vim_free(buf);
8617 return 0;
8618 }
8619
8620 /* compile the regexp into a program */
Bram Moolenaarcc016f52005-12-10 20:23:46 +00008621#ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008622 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */
8623#else
8624 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */
8625#endif
8626 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8627 vim_free(pat);
8628
8629 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8630 {
8631 vim_free(buf);
8632 return 0;
8633 }
8634
8635 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8636 * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8637 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8638 && *path_end == '/')
8639 {
8640 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8641 ++stardepth;
8642 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8643 --stardepth;
8644 }
8645
8646 /* open the directory for scanning */
8647 *s = NUL;
8648 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
8649
8650 /* Find all matching entries */
8651 if (dirp != NULL)
8652 {
8653 for (;;)
8654 {
8655 dp = readdir(dirp);
8656 if (dp == NULL)
8657 break;
8658 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8659 && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
8660 {
8661 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
8662 len = STRLEN(buf);
8663
8664 if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8665 {
8666 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8667 * find matches. */
8668 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8669 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8670 ++stardepth;
8671 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8672 --stardepth;
8673 }
8674
8675 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8676 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
8677 {
8678 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8679 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8680 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8681 }
8682 else
8683 {
8684 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8685 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8686 if (*path_end != NUL)
8687 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8688 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8689 {
8690#if defined(MACOS_X) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
8691 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
8692 char_u *precomp_buf =
8693 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
8694 if (precomp_buf)
8695 {
8696 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
8697 vim_free(precomp_buf);
8698 }
8699#endif
8700 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8701 }
8702 }
8703 }
8704 }
8705
8706 closedir(dirp);
8707 }
8708
8709 vim_free(buf);
8710 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8711
8712 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8713 if (matches > 0)
8714 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
8715 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8716 return matches;
8717}
8718#endif
8719
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008720/*
8721 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8722 *
8723 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8724 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8725 *
8726 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8727 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8728 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8729 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8730 */
8731 int
8732gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8733 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8734 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8735 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8736 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8737 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8738{
8739 int i;
8740 garray_T ga;
8741 char_u *p;
8742 static int recursive = FALSE;
8743 int add_pat;
8744
8745 /*
8746 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8747 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8748 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8749 * return FAIL.
8750 */
8751 if (recursive)
8752#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8753 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8754#else
8755 return FAIL;
8756#endif
8757
8758#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8759 /*
8760 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8761 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8762 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8763 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8764 */
8765 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8766 {
8767 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8768# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8769 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8770# endif
8771 )
8772 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8773 }
8774#endif
8775
8776 recursive = TRUE;
8777
8778 /*
8779 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8780 */
8781 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8782
8783 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8784 {
8785 add_pat = -1;
8786 p = pat[i];
8787
8788#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8789 if (vim_backtick(p))
8790 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8791 else
8792#endif
8793 {
8794 /*
8795 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8796 */
8797 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8798 {
8799 p = expand_env_save(p);
8800 if (p == NULL)
8801 p = pat[i];
8802#ifdef UNIX
8803 /*
8804 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8805 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8806 * found file names and start all over again.
8807 */
8808 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8809 {
8810 vim_free(p);
8811 ga_clear(&ga);
8812 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8813 flags);
8814 recursive = FALSE;
8815 return i;
8816 }
8817#endif
8818 }
8819
8820 /*
8821 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8822 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8823 * the pattern.
8824 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8825 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8826 */
8827 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8828 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8829 }
8830
8831 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8832 {
8833 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8834
8835#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8836 slash_to_colon(t);
8837#endif
8838 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8839 * "vim c:/" work. */
8840 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8841 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8842 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8843 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8844 vim_free(t);
8845 }
8846
8847 if (p != pat[i])
8848 vim_free(p);
8849 }
8850
8851 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8852 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8853
8854 recursive = FALSE;
8855
8856 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8857}
8858
8859# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8860
8861/*
8862 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8863 */
8864 static int
8865vim_backtick(p)
8866 char_u *p;
8867{
8868 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8869}
8870
8871/*
8872 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8873 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8874 * Returns number of file names found.
8875 */
8876 static int
8877expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8878 garray_T *gap;
8879 char_u *pat;
8880 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8881{
8882 char_u *p;
8883 char_u *cmd;
8884 char_u *buffer;
8885 int cnt = 0;
8886 int i;
8887
8888 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8889 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8890 if (cmd == NULL)
8891 return 0;
8892
8893#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8894 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8895 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8896 else
8897#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008898 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8899 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008900 vim_free(cmd);
8901 if (buffer == NULL)
8902 return 0;
8903
8904 cmd = buffer;
8905 while (*cmd != NUL)
8906 {
8907 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8908 p = cmd;
8909 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8910 ++p;
8911 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8912 if (p > cmd)
8913 {
8914 i = *p;
8915 *p = NUL;
8916 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8917 *p = i;
8918 ++cnt;
8919 }
8920 cmd = p;
8921 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8922 ++cmd;
8923 }
8924
8925 vim_free(buffer);
8926 return cnt;
8927}
8928# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8929
8930/*
8931 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8932 * EW_DIR add directories
8933 * EW_FILE add files
8934 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8935 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8936 */
8937 void
8938addfile(gap, f, flags)
8939 garray_T *gap;
8940 char_u *f; /* filename */
8941 int flags;
8942{
8943 char_u *p;
8944 int isdir;
8945
8946 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8947 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8948 return;
8949
8950#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8951 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8952 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8953 return;
8954#endif
8955
8956 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8957 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8958 return;
8959
8960 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8961 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8962 return;
8963
8964 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8965 if (p == NULL)
8966 return;
8967
8968 STRCPY(p, f);
8969#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8970 slash_adjust(p);
8971#endif
8972 /*
8973 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8974 */
8975#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8976 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8977 add_pathsep(p);
8978#endif
8979 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008980}
8981#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8982
8983#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8984
8985#ifndef SEEK_SET
8986# define SEEK_SET 0
8987#endif
8988#ifndef SEEK_END
8989# define SEEK_END 2
8990#endif
8991
8992/*
8993 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8994 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8995 */
8996 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008997get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008998 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008999 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00009000 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
9001{
9002 char_u *tempname;
9003 char_u *command;
9004 char_u *buffer = NULL;
9005 int len;
9006 int i = 0;
9007 FILE *fd;
9008
9009 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
9010 return NULL;
9011
9012 /* get a name for the temp file */
9013 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
9014 {
9015 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
9016 return NULL;
9017 }
9018
9019 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00009020 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00009021 if (command == NULL)
9022 goto done;
9023
9024 /*
9025 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9026 * Don't check timestamps here.
9027 */
9028 ++no_check_timestamps;
9029 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9030 --no_check_timestamps;
9031
9032 vim_free(command);
9033
9034 /*
9035 * read the names from the file into memory
9036 */
9037# ifdef VMS
9038 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
9039 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9040# else
9041 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9042# endif
9043
9044 if (fd == NULL)
9045 {
9046 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9047 goto done;
9048 }
9049
9050 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9051 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
9052 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9053
9054 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9055 if (buffer != NULL)
9056 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9057 fclose(fd);
9058 mch_remove(tempname);
9059 if (buffer == NULL)
9060 goto done;
9061#ifdef VMS
9062 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9063#endif
9064 if (i != len)
9065 {
9066 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9067 vim_free(buffer);
9068 buffer = NULL;
9069 }
9070 else
9071 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9072
9073done:
9074 vim_free(tempname);
9075 return buffer;
9076}
9077#endif
9078
9079/*
9080 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9081 * functions.
9082 */
9083 void
9084FreeWild(count, files)
9085 int count;
9086 char_u **files;
9087{
9088 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
9089 return;
9090#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9091 /*
9092 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9093 * been used???
9094 */
9095 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9096#else
9097 while (count--)
9098 vim_free(files[count]);
9099 vim_free(files);
9100#endif
9101}
9102
9103/*
9104 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9105 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9106 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9107 */
9108 int
9109goto_im()
9110{
9111 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9112}